JP2023054164A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably performing management of a game machine.

SOLUTION: A main control board 61 includes a setting key insertion part 68a, and a setting state of a Pachinko machine 10 can be changed by starting to supply operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 in a state in which ON operation is performed by inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion part 68a. A winning probability of a jackpot result at least in a low-probability mode varies according to the setting state of the Pachinko machine 10. Game history information is stored in a management IC 66, and a management result of a game history is calculated by utilizing the history information at calculation timing. The management result is displayed on notification display devices 69a to 69c and the display state is maintained. When a setting value is changed on the notification display devices 69a to 69c, the corresponding display is performed. When an abnormal state is notified, the corresponding display is performed.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray reservoir are discharged to the lower tray reservoir by being guided by the device (see Patent Document 1, for example).

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP 2009-261415 A

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary that the game be played favorably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably playing a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 is electrically connected to a predetermined detection means and performs a process for giving a game value to a game;
a process executing means electrically connected to the game value imparting means for executing a predetermined process;
In a gaming machine comprising
The game value imparting means is
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information, which is information used in the processing for imparting the game value and is referred to for detection by the predetermined detection means;
After the predetermined supply of electric power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started, the reference data stored in the first reference information storage means a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to information to the processing executing means;
a second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detection means to the processing execution means;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to favorably play a game.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball that has flowed down the game area. It is a front view of a main controller. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in a main-side ROM; It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation start process executed by the main side CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting a detection result of a ball-entering detection sensor to the main side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the various devices which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by payout side CPU. 3 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence memory; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory; It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) to (d) are time charts showing how information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and signal types is stored in a correspondence memory. 9 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU; 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; (a) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. 9 is a flowchart showing output processing of a set value update signal executed by the main CPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing display output processing executed by a management CPU; 4 is a flow chart showing display processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) It is a flowchart which shows the data output process performed by main side CPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the external output process which is performed by management side CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in a main ROM in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of another storage memory in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing repeated change monitoring processing executed by a management CPU; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing repeated change monitoring processing executed by the main CPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the sixth embodiment; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; 4 is a flowchart showing display output processing executed by a management CPU; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F in the ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) to (h) are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for transmitting detection results of each ball-entering detection sensor to the main side CPU and management IC in the tenth embodiment; It is a front view of the main controller in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices under the control of the MPU; 4 is a flow chart showing display processing executed by a management-side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices when the game history management result is displayed; (b) when the setting state of the pachinko machine is changed; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices; (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the first to fourth notification display devices enter a display state. (a) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 1st information display apparatus in 12th Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 2nd information display apparatus. The first notification display device in the case of displaying the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices and in the case of displaying that the setting state of the pachinko machine is changeable. and FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a second notification display device. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an abnormality display area in the thirteenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality setting process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an abnormality display performed by main side CPU. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU in another form.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 2, the configuration inside the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may have a structure in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 23 of the resin base 21 .

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by guide rails.

Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and a and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When a shooting operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, a solenoid 27c is driven and controlled to shoot a game ball.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, etc. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and the others are provided one each.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 , one prize ball is paid out, and when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 prize balls are paid out and sent to the special electric prize winning device 32 When one game ball is entered, 15 prize balls are paid out.

In addition, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may be the first operation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the game ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game ball is also expressed as winning.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. - 特許庁

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the common electric open state, the common electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device. , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the lottery is clearly shown through the display effect on the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

In detail, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is reserved up to four, and the number of reservations is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display part 37b.

More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT, or a dot matrix display device. may

In the design display device 41, when the fluctuation display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 37a based on the winning to the first operation port 33 or the winning to the second operation port 34, the pattern is displayed according to it A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, three pattern rows of upper, middle and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas. The symbols are scroll-displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, scroll display is first started in all symbol rows, then the scroll display is switched to standby display in the order of upper symbol row→lower symbol row→middle symbol row. The game ends with the design still displayed. Then, in a game turn in which the game result is a jackpot result, a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed on the preset effective line on the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41 . Specifically, when the maximum winning jackpot result described later is obtained, the combination of the same odd numbered symbols is stopped and displayed, and when the low probability jackpot result described later is obtained, the combination of the same even numbered symbols is stopped and displayed. In the case of a low winning high probability big winning result, the combination of symbols which are not the same combination of symbols but not the low winning high probability big winning result are stop-displayed.

In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effect during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. will be In addition, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33, 34, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the predetermined result is displayed and the end is one of the game rounds. times. In addition, the pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner without being limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

When a big win is won in a winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible. The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win prizes when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It has become. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area PA.

As already explained, a game ball entering any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the out opening 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowed into the game area PA is any of the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a It will be discharged from the game area PA by entering the ball into. A game ball entering any one of the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a is led to the back side of the game board 24.例文帳に追加

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are led to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the discharge passages 42 to 48 into which they flowed in, and are sent to a discharge ball recovery section (not shown). is recovered. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls are provided in the discharge passages 42 to 48, respectively. These discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general prize winning openings 31 are provided as already explained, there are discharge passage portions 42 to 44 corresponding to each of these four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general prize winning port 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general prize winning port 31 adjacent thereto. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is in the middle of the second discharge passage portion 43. A second winning hole detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball entering the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage part 42, and enters the general winning hole 31 on the right side. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. FIG. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is formed so as to join the two general prize winning openings 31 on the right side at a midway position. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one exit side area by joining the entrance side areas in the middle. are doing. A third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage portion 44 . A game ball that enters one of the two right-side general winning holes 31 is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44. - 特許庁

A fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32 . A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball entering the special electric prize winning device 32 passes through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first operation port 33 . A first operation opening detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and the game ball entering the first operation opening 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 46. It is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a while passing through. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second operation port 34 . A second operation opening detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and the game ball entering the second operation opening 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. It is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a while it is passing through. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 is present corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball entering the out port 24a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

A game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 on the way down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

Electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, but any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 42a-49a are electrically connected to a main controller 60 which will be described later, and detection results of the various detection sensors 42a-49a are output to the main controller 60. FIG. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when no game ball is detected, and output a HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed without being limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21 . As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 through which substantially the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this, and may be made of a synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A display light-emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51 . A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 55 bulging forward and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged below the window portion 51 . An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. As shown in FIG. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) for main control of the game. FIG. 5 is a front view of the main controller 60. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5, the main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. An MPU 62 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 61 . The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 accommodated in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. Although the board box 60a is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 accommodated in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. The main controller 60 is mounted on the rear surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a such that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the pachinko machine 10 rearward. Therefore, by opening the game machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to see the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a and It is possible to see the MPU 62 through the opposing wall portion 60b.

The board box 60a is formed by assembling a plurality of case bodies 60c back and forth, and the plurality of case bodies 60c prevents the separation of the case bodies 60c and leaves traces of the case bodies 60c when the case bodies 60c are separated. A coupling portion 60e is provided for leaving the . A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 60a. As a result, in a state in which separation of the case body 60c is prevented by using some of the joints 60e, even if the case body 60c is separated by destroying the part of the joints 60e, another joint is subsequently performed. By bringing the portion 60e into the coupled state, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case body 60c again. In addition, since the connecting portion 60e is destroyed and a trace remains when the case body 60c is separated, it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body 60c is illegally separated by visually checking the connecting portion 60e. It becomes possible. In addition, a sealing seal 60f is attached to one side of the substrate box 60a opposite to the one side on which the connecting portions 60e are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. When the sealing seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c. As a result, when the sealing seal 60f is peeled off when the case body 60c is separated, it is possible to leave a trace.

In the main control device 60 having the above configuration, the main control board 61 is owned by the manager of the game hall in order to generate an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 within the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6". A setting key insertion unit 68a into which a setting key is inserted and turned ON, an update button 68b operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the ON operation to the setting key insertion unit 68a, and a main control unit. A reset button 68c operated to clear the data of a main side RAM 65 provided in the MPU 62 of 60, which will be described later, and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management results of the game history. , is provided. In addition, the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 so that the management result of the game history or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 can be read by the external device. A reading terminal 68d is provided for the purpose. Incidentally, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and any number of stages may be used.

These setting key insertion portion 68a, update button 68b, reset button 68c, reading terminal 68d (that is, MPU 62), and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61. ing. The device mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the facing wall 60b of the board box 60a as already described, but the setting key insertion part 68a, update button 68b, reset button 68c and reading terminal 68d face each other. It is not covered by the wall portion 60b. That is, the opposed wall portion 60b has individual openings in areas opposed to the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it is possible to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion portion 68a without opening the board box 60a, to press the update button 68b, and to press the reset button 68c. It is possible to connect a connection terminal of an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

By inserting the setting key into the setting key inserting portion 68a and rotating it in a predetermined direction, the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned on. By starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in that state (that is, by starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60), the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. changeable state. In this state, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed step by step in the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6" in ascending order. When the update button 68b is operated in the state of "setting 6", the state is updated to "setting 1". The setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion portion 68a from the ON operation position in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction to return to the initial position. Become. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off, the changeable state ends, and the game can be played with the set values at that time. In other words, even if the update button 68b is operated after the changeable state ends, the setting value cannot be changed.

The ON operation for the setting key insertion portion 68a is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned ON after the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has completed the operation power supply start process, the setting value cannot be changed.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of "setting n" (n is an integer from "1" to "6") (that is, setting The higher the value, the higher the advantage. Although the details will be described later, there are a low probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively high as a winning lottery mode that determines the winning probability of the jackpot result, and the set value is It is set so that the higher the value, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot results in the high probability mode is constant regardless of the set value.

The reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 as described above, but in order to clear the data, the operating power must be supplied to the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is pressed. (that is, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). The ON operation for the reset button 68c is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the reset button 68c is pressed after the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 completes the operation power supply start process, the data in the main RAM 65 cannot be cleared.

As already explained, the reading terminal 68d is connected to the connection terminal of the external device so that the management result of the game history or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 can be read by the external device. In order to perform external output to, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the connection terminal of the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d (that is, the operation of the main controller 60 to the MPU 62 power must be turned on). The connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is enabled only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d after the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has completed the processing for starting the supply of operating power, no external output to the external device is performed.

Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is installed so that its display surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces. covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is transparent, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c housed in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. becomes possible. As already explained, the main controller 60 is mounted on the rear surface of the resin base 21 in the substrate box 60a so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the game machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notifications are made through the opposing wall portion 60b. It is possible to view the display surfaces of the display devices 69a to 69c.

On the display surface of the first notification display device 69a, not only numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetic characters are displayed. On the other hand, the numbers "0" to "9" are displayed on the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c. The management results of the game history are notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the content of this notification will be described in detail later. Further, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. The value corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the first notification display device 69a, or may be displayed on the second notification display device 69b. In addition, the setting value before entering the changeable state is displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the current setting value is displayed on the first to third notification display devices. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the information is displayed on another notification display device out of the display devices 69a to 69c.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60 . The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 73 and a controller assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72 .

The payout mechanism part 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76.例文帳に追加The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power ON and OFF.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling a payout device 76, and a predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and output, and is accompanied by the operation of the shooting operation device 28 by the player. A power supply/shooting control device 78 for controlling the launching of game balls is provided. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power outage monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 . The MPU 62 incorporates a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section. In addition to the elements described above, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used exclusively for reading. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to retain data, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64 .

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages game history based on information supplied from the main CPU 63 . Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of game balls to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of ball entry into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is grasped according to the grasped ball entering history. Further, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, is grasped by the management IC 66 .

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main controller 60 . A power supply/emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67 , and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67 .

Various sensors such as ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62 . As already described, the respective ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a include the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection. A sensor 46a, a second working opening detection sensor 47a, an outlet detection sensor 48a and a gate detection sensor 49a are included. Based on the detection results of these ball-entering detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether a ball is entering each ball-entering section. Further, in the main CPU 63, various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the second operating port 34.

The input side of the MPU 62 is provided with a setting key insertion portion 68a, an update button 68b and a reset button 68c provided on the main control board 61 . A sensor (not shown) is provided in the setting key inserting portion 68a, and the sensor detects whether the setting key inserting portion 68a is arranged at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. Based on the detection result from the sensor, the main CPU 63 identifies whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is located at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. The update button 68b is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the update button 68b is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the update button 68b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. The reset button 68c is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected with a power failure monitor board 67, a payout control device 77 and a sound emission control device 81. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on, for example, a game ball entering a prize ball corresponding ball entry portion among the ball entry portions where the occurrence of the ball entry corresponds to the payout of the game ball. be. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81 .

On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the open/close door 32a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34, A figure unit 37 and a general figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure reservation display section 37b, but all of these are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map reservation display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the driving control of the special electric driving unit 32b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the general electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the main side CPU 63 executes drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Moreover, display control of the special figure display part 37a is performed in main side CPU63 in the case of each game time. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not to set the general electric accessory 34a to the open state is specified, the main side CPU 63 controls the display of the general pattern display unit 38a. Also, when the winning prize to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display control of the special figure reservation display unit 37b in the main side CPU63 is executed, and when winning to the through gate 35 occurs, or when variable display is started in the normal pattern display unit 38a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the normal pattern reservation display unit 38b.

First to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. FIG. In addition, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 is notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the display of the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b is controlled by the management IC 66 and is not controlled by the main CPU 63, whereas the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63. The display is controlled and the display is controlled by the management IC 66 . Display control by the main side CPU 63 has priority over display control by the management IC 66 for the display of the third notification display device 69c.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third notification display device 69c may also be configured so that the display is controlled by the management IC 66 and the display is not controlled by the main CPU 63 . In this case, when the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the main side CPU 63 instructs the management IC 66 to display the setting value. good.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d. A sensor (not shown) is provided at the reading terminal 68d, and the sensor detects whether or not a connection terminal of an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d based on the detection result from the sensor. When an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the game history management result in the management IC 66 or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 is output to the external device.

The blackout monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power/launch control device 78 and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power/launch control device 78, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 .

The power/emission control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Electric power for memory retention is supplied to the main side RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60 . The power/shooting control device 78 controls the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 27, and the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Further, as already explained, the payout mechanism 73 is provided with a power switch, and when the power switch is turned ON, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and the power switch is turned OFF. , the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

The audio light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and controls the display control device 82. is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81 .

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lottery Draws by Main Side CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main side CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the display setting of the special figure display section 37a, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the normal figure display section 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of winning generation, the big winning type counter C2 used when judging the big winning type, and the pattern display device 41 fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when doing, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the pattern display device 41 are determined. A variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, it is decided to use the general electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 is in the general electrical open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main side RAM 65 as acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The pending storage area 65a comprises a pending area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3, and a fourth reservation area RE4. In addition, a combination of each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second Each numerical information is stored chronologically in order of reservation area RE2→third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are retained and stored. .

It should be noted that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and the start of one game round. At that time, the success or failure determination is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the universal electrical role item release counter C4 will be described. For example, the universal electrical role item release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the general electric reservation area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric role item 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric role item opening counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the mode of support by the general electric role item 34a is different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously shot in the same manner in the game area PA, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 opens per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of states is relatively high and low.

In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electric open state in the general electric open lottery using the general electric accessory open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). , in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electrical role 34a is in the open state when the general electrical open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the open time is set longer. It is In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the general electric open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., the The duration of one display on the display section 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than in the second operation opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is higher than the first operation opening 33. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 34 is increased. When a prize is awarded to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequent than the low-frequency support mode to become the electric power open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, in the electric power open lottery A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the electric power open state is increased. In addition, after one general electric open lottery is performed, the time secured for the next general electric open lottery In a configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, in the high-frequency support mode, it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than in the low-frequency support mode, or is set so that the average reserved time is shorter. good too. In addition, the number of open times is increased, the open time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured after one electric power open lottery is held and the next electric power open lottery is held is shortened. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

Here, as already explained, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6", but the opening frequency and opening mode of the general electric role 34a in the low frequency support mode Even the setting values are the same, and the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general electrical accessory 34a in the high-frequency support mode are also the same regardless of the setting values. However, it is not limited to this, and at least one of the opening frequency and opening mode of the general electric role 34a for at least one of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening the general electrical accessory 34a in the low-frequency support mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of a game ball entering the mouth 34 is increased. In addition, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening the general electrical accessory 34a in the high-frequency support mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the ball entry probability of the game ball to the operation opening 34 is increased.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 65a of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

The values of random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored in the main ROM 64 as a success/failure table. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64. As shown in FIG. Low-probability tables 64a to 64f for the low-probability mode and a high-probability table 64g for the high-probability mode are stored as the correctness tables.

The low certainty tables 64a to 64f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". That is, the low accuracy table 64a for setting 1 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1" and the setting referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2" A low accuracy table 64b for 2, a low accuracy table 64c for setting 3 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3", and a setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". The low accuracy table 64d for setting 4 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5", the low accuracy table 64e for setting 5 referred to when the setting state is "setting 5", and the pachinko machine 10 There is a low certainty table 64f for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 6".

These low probability tables 64a to 64f are set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result. Specifically, when the low certainty table 64a for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/320, and when the low certainty table 64b for setting 2 is referred, about 1/310. When the low certainty table 64c for setting 3 is referred to, the result is about 1/300, and when the low certainty table 64d for setting 4 is referred, about 1/290. When the low certainty table 64e for setting 5 is referred to, the result is about 1/280, and when the low certainty table 64f for setting 6 is referred, about 1/270. result in a big hit. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting value, it becomes easier for a large winning result to occur in the low-probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, the high certainty table 64g is provided with only one type so as to be common to any setting state of "setting 1" to "setting 6". The high-probability table 64g is set so that the winning probability of the jackpot results is higher than the low-probability tables 64a-64f in any setting state of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Specifically, when the high certainty table 64g is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/30. As a result, regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the high-probability mode can be made more advantageous than the low-probability mode. In addition, even in the lowest setting state "setting 1", it is possible to increase the probability of a big hit result by entering the high probability mode than in the low probability mode of "setting 6" which is the highest setting state. becomes. In addition, as for the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of advantages or disadvantages depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and suppress the storage capacity for pre-storing the high probability table 64g in the main side ROM 64. becomes possible.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are (1) the aspect of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) the first prize after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34.

As a aspect of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of winning of the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end thereof is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in both the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the round game is executed up to a predetermined number of times as an upper limit.

A round game is a game that continues until either one of the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins in the special electric winning device 32 is satisfied. That is. In addition, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the big win is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of the result of the big win triggered by the shift. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of the jackpot result.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening modes of the special electric prize winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from the opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closing thereof. Specifically, a long-time mode in which the open duration is set to 29 seconds, which is a long time, and a short-time mode, in which the open duration is set to 0.06 seconds, which is a short time shorter than the above-mentioned long time, are set. It is

In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. be done. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open continuation time is set to be longer than the product of the shooting cycle of the game ball and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening continuation time is set to be shorter than the product of the shooting cycle of the game ball and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, when one opening is performed in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and one time in the short-time mode. When the opening is performed for the first time, it is expected that no prize will be won to the special electric prize winning device 32, or that there will be only one prize if there is a prize.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

In the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of times of opening and closing the special electric winning device 32, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, and is not limited to the above value, and is arbitrary is.

As shown in FIG. 8, the distribution destination of the jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table 64h. In the distribution table 64h, low-probability jackpot results, low-win high-probability jackpot results, and maximum-benefit jackpot results are set as jackpot results in the case of a jackpot result.

A low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition.

The result of the low winning high probability jackpot is that the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery results in a big win state winning, and the game shifts to a big win state accordingly.

The maximum profit jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery results in a big win state winning, and the game shifts to a big win state accordingly.

In relation to each game state, the normal game state is not the open/close execution mode, but the win/fail lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In addition, as a game result, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a low winning high probability jackpot result is not set. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode in the low winning high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be less than in the case of the low probability jackpot result and the maximum profit jackpot result.

In the distribution table 64h, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to low probability jackpot results, and "10 to 14" correspond to low winning high probability jackpot results. Correspondingly, "15-29" corresponds to the maximum winning jackpot result.

Only one sorting table 64h is provided so that it is common to any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from producing an advantage or a disadvantage in terms of the distribution mode of the jackpot results, and the memory capacity for pre-storing the distribution table 64h in the main-side ROM 64.例文帳に追加can be suppressed.

It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the distribution mode of the jackpot result is different according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 . For example, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of being assigned to the maximum advantageous jackpot result, or the higher the set value, the higher the probability of being assigned to the maximum advantageous jackpot result or the low winning high probability jackpot result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of entering the high-probability mode after a big win. In addition, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of being distributed to the low winning high probability jackpot result. It is good also as a structure which can be distributed to a jackpot result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加The expected effect is a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing a variable display of symbols, and the symbol display device 41 in which the final stop result is the award corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined big win result. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the grant correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started in . Concretely, a combination of symbols with the same number on any of the activated lines is stopped and displayed with respect to the award correspondence result.

There are two types of expectation effects: a ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the occurrence of the grant correspondence result in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

In the ready-to-win display, a combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. It includes a display state in which symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform a ready-to-win effect. , the ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or hiding the combination of the ready-to-win symbols.

In the advance notice display, the symbols are variably displayed in all of the symbol rows after the symbol variability display is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, or in a part of the symbol rows and a plurality of symbols are displayed. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row. It also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern row in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such an advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Also, in a game cycle corresponding to a big hit result in which the same combination of symbols is not stop-displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, in the game round corresponding to the result of losing, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 is executed when the reach display corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission control device 81 . In this case, the sound emission control device 81 determines that the game round corresponding to one of the jackpot results is more likely to generate the notice display than the game round corresponding to the result of losing, and that the notice display with a low appearance rate is more likely to occur. Lottery processing for advance notice display is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being likely to occur. Incidentally, the result of the lottery is reflected when the symbol display device 41 executes an effect for a game cycle.

Here, the probability of occurrence of the ready-to-win display in game rounds resulting in a loss is the same regardless of the setting state of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from being advantageous or disadvantageous with respect to the probability of occurrence of the ready-to-win display in game rounds resulting in a loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of occurrence of the ready-to-win display in game rounds in which the result is an error.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used for determining the display duration time in the special figure display section 37a and the display duration time of the design in the design display device 41 in the main side CPU 63. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display unit 37a and at the start of variation in the design by the design display device 41.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 can be roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on (step S103). If the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned ON (step S103: NO), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S104: YES), each area of the main RAM 65 is cleared except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 65. 0” is cleared (step S105). That is, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while pressing the reset button 68c without turning ON the setting key inserting portion 68a, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 for the information of the set value is performed. The clearing process of the main side RAM 65 is executed while maintaining the state before the power supply is stopped. As a result, other areas of the main RAM 65 can be initialized without changing the set values.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S106). A power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 65, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved when the power was shut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S107). . When the process of step S105 is executed, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether or not the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by confirming the main side RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, if the setting value is any one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal.

When a negative determination is made in any of steps S106 to S108, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after executing an error notification process for notifying the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S109), an infinite loop occurs. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the all clear process (step S117), which will be described later.

If affirmative determinations are made in all steps S106 to S108, power-on setting processing is executed (step S110). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 65 is set to an initial value such as initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Further, after executing the process of step S110, a recognition process (step S111) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and outputting various data to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. data output processing for the purpose is executed (step S112). The details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when the main processing is started. The state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S112 is completed and the process of step S113 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S112 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S113 is started. Therefore, the main side CPU 63 does not start the processing for advancing the game until this situation is reached.

After that, the remaining processing of steps S113 to S116 is performed. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S113 to S116 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, the remaining processes of steps S113 to S116 can be said to be non-periodic processes that are executed non-periodically.

In the remaining process, first, in step S113, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S114, random number initial value update processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is performed, and in step S115, variation counter update processing for updating the variation type counter CS is performed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, they are cleared to "0" when the counter value exceeds the maximum value. After that, in step S116, an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. When the process of step S116 has been executed, the process returns to step S113, and the processes of steps S113 to S116 are repeated.

On the other hand, if the setting key insertion part 68a is ON-operated (step S103: YES), the main side RAM 65 including the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main side RAM 65 All areas are cleared to "0" (step S117). That is, when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, all areas of the main side RAM 65 are cleared to "0" even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. In addition, it is not limited to this, and even if an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, all of the main side RAM 65 A configuration may be adopted in which the all clear process is executed when the reset button 68c is pressed while an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is being performed without the clear process being executed.

After that, in step S118, set value update processing is executed, and in step S119, after output processing of a set value update signal is executed, the process proceeds to step S110. The set value update process will be described below. The output processing of the setting value update signal will be described later in detail. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the set value update process.

First, "1" is set in the set value counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S201). The setting value counter is a counter for specifying which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is by the main side CPU 63 . By setting "1" to the set value counter, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point when the set value update process is executed.

After that, a set value display start process is executed (step S202). In the setting value display start process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed. The manager of the game hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c when changing the setting value.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned off (step S203: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203 to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204: YES), 1 is added to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S205). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S206: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S207). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting value is changed to "setting 1". going back.

When a negative determination is made in step S206, or when the process of step S207 is executed, the setting value display update process is executed (step S208). In the set value display update process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main side RAM 65 is displayed. By confirming the third notification display device 69c, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S208, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S203: NO), the processing after step S204 is executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S203: YES), the setting value display termination process is executed (step S209). In the setting value display end processing, the display of the setting values on the third notification display device 69c is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

First, power failure information storage processing is executed (step S301). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed and then an infinite loop is performed. Become. In the power failure processing, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S302). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric role release counter C4, and the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Afterwards, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, they are cleared to "0" when the counter value exceeds the maximum value. After that, in step S303, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S114, and in step S304, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S115.

After that, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S305). In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred. In the following step S306, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S306, the processes after step S307 are executed.

In step S307, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, read processing is executed (step S308). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S309). In the ball-entering detection process, signals received from the ball-entering detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the reading results, the out port 24a, the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, and the first operation port 33 , the presence or absence of the ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the ball-entering detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 (step S310). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

After that, a shooting control process for controlling shooting of game balls is executed (step S311). In a situation where the shooting operation to the shooting operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is shot in 0.6 sec which is a predetermined shooting cycle. In the subsequent step S312, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S308, disconnection confirmation of each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a, opening confirmation of the game machine body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. I do.

After that, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game round and execution control of the opening and closing execution mode is executed (step S313). Special figure special electric control processing is explained in detail later.

After that, the general map general electric control process is executed (step S314). In the general map general electric control process, when the prize to the through gate 35 is generated, the processing for acquiring the reservation information on the general map side is executed, and when the reservation information on the general map side is stored Then, open determination is performed for the reservation information, and processing for performing the production for the normal map is performed with the open determination as a trigger. Moreover, based on the result of open determination, the process which opens and closes the universal electrical accessory 34a of the 2nd operation|movement opening 34 is performed. In this case, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, corresponding processing is executed, and if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, corresponding processing is executed. Further, when the opening/closing execution mode is set, the low-frequency support mode is set even if the immediately preceding support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

In subsequent step S315, based on the processing results of step S313 and step S314 immediately before, while setting the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information pertaining to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure pending display unit 37b , Set the output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number of the reservation information related to the normal map display unit 38a in the normal map reservation display unit 38b. Further, in step S315, based on the processing results of step S313 and step S314 immediately before, along with setting the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a, the display content of the normal figure display unit 38a Set the output information for updating.

After that, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and payout state reception processing is executed for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S316). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S317). Also, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S318). Thereafter, management output processing for outputting information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S319). Details of the management output process will be described later.

Next, the special figure special electric control process of step S313 is demonstrated, referring the flowchart of FIG.

First, a hold information acquisition process is executed (step S401). In the hold information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 has occurred, and if the winning has occurred, the number of reservations in the reservation storage area 65a is the upper limit It is determined whether or not it is less than a value ("4" in this embodiment). If the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, the number of reservations is incremented by 1, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 is used for holding. Store in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. It should be noted that when the winning to the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 occurs at the same time, the processing for acquiring the above-described pending information is executed within the range of executing the processing for acquiring the pending information once. Run multiple times. Also, when the hold information is newly acquired, a command at the time of acquisition corresponding to it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . When receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of pieces of pending information on the pattern display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the increase of the pending information.

After that, the information of the special special electric counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S402), and the special special electric address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S403). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special special electric counter is acquired from the special special electric counter (step S404), and jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address among the processes of steps S406 to S412 (step S405 ). The special special electric counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes of steps S406 to S412 should be executed, and the special special electric address table is a counter for the special special electric counter. A start address of a program for executing the processes of steps S406 to S412 is set in association with the numerical information.

In step S406, special figure fluctuation start processing is executed. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the special figure variation start process.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, on condition that the number of pieces of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE is 1 or more (step S501: YES), data setting processing is executed (step S502). In the data setting process, first, the number of reservations is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side. , the third reservation area RE3→the second reservation area RE2, the fourth reservation area RE4→the third reservation area RE3, etc. After that, the fourth reservation area RE4 is cleared to "0". At this time, a shift command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 for recognizing that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. When receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of pieces of pending information on the pattern display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the decrease of the pending information.

After executing the data setting process, the right/wrong table is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, first, the current winning/failing lottery mode is grasped by reading information indicating the winning/failure lottery mode from the main RAM 65 . In the case of the high probability mode, the high probability table 64g is read from the main side ROM64. On the other hand, when it is in the low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter of the main side RAM65. Then, the low accuracy tables 64a to 64f corresponding to the comprehended setting values are read from the main ROM 64. FIG.

After that, the success/failure determination processing is executed with reference to the success/failure tables 64a to 64g read in step S503 (step S504). In the success/failure determination process, the information for success/failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1 is the big winning numerical information set in the success/failure tables 64a to 64g read in step S503. It is determined whether or not they match.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S505: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S506). In the distribution determination process, out of the information stored in the execution area AE, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is read. Then, referring to the distribution table 64h provided in the main ROM 64, it specifies which jackpot result the numerical information related to the read jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. Specifically, it specifies which one of the low probability jackpot result, the low prize winning high probability jackpot result, and the maximum profit jackpot result corresponds.

After that, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S507). Specifically, the information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is obtained from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. specified, and writes the specified information in the main side RAM 65 . In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the form of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

After that, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result, and in step S508, among the flags corresponding to each jackpot result type, A flag corresponding to the result is set to "1".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S509). Specifically, the information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is obtained from the stop result table for the deviation result stored in advance in the main side ROM 64 specified, and writes the specified information in the main side RAM 65 . The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After executing the process of either step S508 or step S509, the process of grasping the duration of the game round is executed (step S510). In such processing, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Also, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is the result of the low-probability jackpot or the result of the maximum profit jackpot, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, when neither of the jackpot results is obtained and the numerical information relating to the ready-to-win random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it is determined that a ready-to-win display occurs.

When it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs, the continuous period table for ready-to-win occurrence generation stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and the duration of the game cycle corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the continuous period table for no-to-win occurrence stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and the continuation of the game round corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS. Get duration. Incidentally, the duration of game rounds that can be acquired by referring to the non-reach duration table is different from the duration of game rounds that can be acquired by referring to the duration table for reach occurrence.

It should be noted that the continuation period of the game round when the ready-to-win situation does not occur is set so that the continuation period of the game round becomes shorter as the number of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, a shorter duration of game rounds is selected. A non-reach duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the duration of the game cycle does not change according to the number of pieces of pending information or the support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the continuation period of the game cycle when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, the duration table may be set individually for each of the case of the loss reach and the case of the loss result of no reach. In this case, the continuation period of the game round is distributed according to each game result.

After that, the information of the duration of the game round acquired in step S510 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S511). The update of the numerical information set in the special special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process (step S310). By the way, as an effect for the game cycle, the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a and the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 are performed. is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the activated line), the final stop display is performed for the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec). In this case, the duration of the game round acquired in step S510 is the total time for one game round.

After that, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S512). The variation command includes information on the duration of game rounds. Here, as described above, the duration of the game round obtained by referring to the non-reach duration table is different from the duration of the game round obtained by referring to the reach occurrence duration table. Even if the variation command does not include information on the presence or absence of the occurrence of reach, the sound emission control device 81 can specify the presence or absence of the occurrence of reach from the information on the duration of the game cycle. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach occurrence. Also, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the voice emission control device 81 receives the command for variation and the type command from the main side CPU 63, the display light emission portion 53, the speaker portion 54 and the pattern display device 41 execute the effect for the game round. In this case, the effect for the game round is performed in a mode corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command. In addition, the pattern display device 41 performs a variable display of symbols as an effect for the game cycle, and when the effect for the game cycle ends, a combination of symbols corresponding to the results of the winning/failure determination process and the distribution determination process is displayed. Stop is displayed.

Then, the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display part 37a is started (step S513). Then, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter (step S514). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is "0", the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1". After that, the eleventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that a game cycle has started to the management IC 66 .

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 52), in step S407, the special figure fluctuation processing is executed. In the special figure fluctuation process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing before the final stop display during the duration of the game round, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display section 37a is regulated. Execute processing to change the When it is time to display the final stop, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation processing to the special figure fixed processing. update to something. In this embodiment, the main CPU 63 does not send the final stop command to the sound emission control device 81 .

In step S408, processing during special figure determination is executed. In the processing during special figure determination, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display section 37a is set to the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. Also, in the special figure determination process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and when the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs. When the transition to the opening/closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special special electric counter is cleared to "0". When the transition to the opening and closing execution mode occurs, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special electric confirmation processing to the one corresponding to the special electric start processing. Update.

In step S409, special electric start processing is executed. In the special electric start process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not yet been executed, the opening period setting process is executed. Also, an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Upon receiving the opening command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display emission section 53, the speaker section 54 and the pattern display device 41 to perform the opening effect. When the opening period has passed, a start process for starting the first round game is executed. In the start processing, the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in an open state, and conditions for ending the round game are set. When setting the end condition, the upper limit duration time for continuing the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state in the first round game of this time is set, and the special electric prize winning device 32 can win in the first round game of this time. The upper limit number of game balls is set in a winning number counter provided in the main side RAM 65. - 特許庁

In step S410, special electric open processing is executed. In the special electric open process, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is established. When the termination condition is established, the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. Then, if the round game ended this time is not the last round game to be executed, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special electric open processing to the special electric closed processing. If the round game that ended this time is the last round game, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2, so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special electric open processing. Update from one to one corresponding to the special electric end processing.

In step S411, processing during special electric closing is executed. In the special electric closing process, it is determined whether or not the interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period has passed, the special electric prize winning device 32 is put into an open state, and the end condition of the round game is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical value information of the special special electric counter, the numerical value information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the one corresponding to the special electric open processing.

In step S412, special electric end processing is executed. In the special electric end processing, if the processing for starting the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not yet been executed, the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set and the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. By receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53, the speaker section 54 and the pattern display device 41 to execute the ending effect. When the ending period elapses, each of the success/failure lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set to a mode corresponding to the result of the big win that triggered the start of the opening/closing execution mode this time.

Next, in the main side CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a to the main side CPU 63. As shown in FIG.

The main side CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle 8 types of signals simultaneously. Areas for storing "0" or "1" information according to the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7. In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, the number of signals to be input to the input port 63a is limited to eight types by the driver IC. Switched through switching control.

In the entering ball detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special train detection sensor 45a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working opening detection sensor 46a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working opening detection sensor 47a, The 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a detects the passage of the game ball by outputting a LOW level signal indicating non-detection as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected. In this case, a HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output as a detection signal. When the input port 63a receives a LOW level signal, it stores "0" information in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HI level signal, stores "1" in the corresponding bit. store the information of In other words, in a situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected by the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the information "0" corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is stored. In the detected state, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S601: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S602), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S603). . The first output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a to the management IC 66. is a flag. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 10 prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 10-ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the first bit D1 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S604: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S605), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S606). . The second output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a to the management IC 66. is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the second bit D2 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S607: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S608), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S609). . The third output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a to the management IC 66. is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the third bit D3 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S610: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S611), the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S612), and further The value of the 15 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special electric prize flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game in the open/close execution mode. By confirming that the special electric prize flag is set to "1" in the special electric prize control processing (step S313) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32. It specifies that a ball has been generated, and subtracts 1 from the number of remaining balls that can enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game. When the process of subtracting 1 from the possible number of winning balls is executed, the special electric winning prize flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. . The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 15 game balls should be executed. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (Fig. 11), and the 15 prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the fourth bit D4 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first operation opening detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S615), and the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S616). Furthermore, the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S617). The first operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the first operation opening 33 . In the special figure special electric control processing (step S313) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), by confirming that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", it is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than the upper limit of four, a process of newly storing pending information is executed. It is confirmed that "1" is set to the first operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control processing (step S313), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0" do. The fifth output flag is for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operating opening detection sensor 46a should be output to the management IC 66. is a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, a one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and a one prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is subtracted by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state where information "0" is stored in the fifth bit D5 has changed to the state where information "1" is stored, the second operating opening detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S618: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S619), and the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S620). Furthermore, the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the second operation opening 34 . In the special figure special electric control processing (step S313) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", it is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than the upper limit of four, a process of newly storing pending information is executed. It is confirmed that "1" is set to the second operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control processing (step S313), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The sixth output flag is for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a should be output to the management IC 66. is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the outlet detecting sensor 48a. is detected (step S622: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66. be.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S624: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35 . By confirming that "1" is set to the gate winning prize flag in the normal map general electric control processing (step S314) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), the general map stored in the general electric reservation area 65c On the condition that the number of pending information on the side is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, the processing of storing the numerical information of the current general electric utility item open counter C4 in the general electric holding area 65c as the holding information on the general map side. to run. It is confirmed that "1" is set to the gate winning flag in the general/universal electric control processing (step S314), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

In addition, since the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 4 msec as already explained, when one game ball detection sensor 42a to 49a starts detecting one game ball, the entering ball The main side CPU 63 identifies that one game ball has been detected by the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a while the detection sensors 42a to 49a continue to detect the one game ball. done. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices communicating with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The payout control device 77 has an MPU 91 . The MPU 91 incorporates a payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 92 .

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM that requires external power supply for memory retention (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The payout-side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and has a faster read time than the payout-side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93 .

The payout side CPU 92 can perform two-way communication with the main side CPU 63 . When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game balls can be paid out normally, and if it is specified that it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally, the payout side RAM 94 To stop a payout device 76 even in a situation where unpaid prize ball number information is stored. Also, the payout side CPU 92 transmits to the main side CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that the payout cannot be performed normally. When the main side CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 notify that the game balls cannot be paid out normally. A notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 so that A state in which the lower tray 56a is full of game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with game balls, and a payout device 76 are states in which game balls cannot be normally dispensed. does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the game machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the tank is full when the game balls are continuously detected by the full-tank detection sensor, and the state in which the game balls are continuously detected by the full-tank detection sensor is cancelled. It specifies that the full tank state is canceled when the tank is full.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76 , and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout-side CPU 92 identifies the state of no ball when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor is cancelled. Determine that the ballless state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76 , and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout abnormal state occurs when the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor in spite of driving and controlling the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. , When the state in which the game balls are not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled, it is specified that the abnormal payout state is canceled.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92 . In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the dispensing side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. , the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92 . The dispensing side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closed detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, and when receiving the open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95. Identify that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In addition, the dispensing side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is specified to have changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A front door closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 at the timing. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door open command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the front door closing command.

A main body open sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92 . In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. Identify that the main body 12 is in the open state. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing specified that the game machine body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specified that the game machine body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A body closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the main body closing command.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, the full-tank process is executed (step S701). In the full-tank processing, as already explained, based on the detection result of the full-tank detection sensor, it is specified whether or not the tank is full, and if the tank is full, processing for stopping the payout of game balls. is executed, and a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 . Further, when the full tank state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state has been canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

After that, a ball useless process is executed (step S702). In the no-ball processing, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the ball is in the no-ball state based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor. While executing, it transmits a command indicating that there is no ball to the main side CPU 63 . Further, when the no-ball state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S703). In the abnormal payout monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the abnormal payout state is present based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if the abnormal payout state exists, the process of stopping the payout of game balls is executed. At the same time, it transmits to the main side CPU 63 a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, front door opening monitoring processing is executed (step S704). In the front door open monitoring process, as already described, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95. If the front door frame 14 is open, A front door opening command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 while executing processing for stopping the payout of game balls. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S705). In the main body open monitoring process, as already described, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, a game ball is detected. , and transmits a body opening command to the main side CPU 63 . Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S706). In the command read processing, processing for reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main side CPU 63 is executed, and the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94 . Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the undistributed prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S707), game balls are paid out by the payout device 76 Payout control processing for controlling the execution of is executed (step S708). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the drive control of the payout device 76 is performed, and one game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. When it does, 1 is subtracted from the value of prize ball number information. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the driving control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, external information setting processing is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processing executed in the current timer interrupt processing (step S709).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97 . The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some of which are A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92 . Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal plate 97, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 send information to the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. It is possible to output

One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95 and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96 . More specifically, a signal relay board 98 is provided in the middle of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92 . The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 directed from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal plate 97 for opening the front door. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97 . As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without going through the control by the payout side CPU 92 .

More specifically, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 extending from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92 . The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal plate 97 for opening the main body. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the body on the external terminal plate 97 . This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without intervention of the control by the payout side CPU 92 .

Next, the contents of the information externally output from the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

The main CPU 63 performs information output setting to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that one game cycle has ended. Information indicating that and a predetermined number (for example, 100) game balls from the game area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 Information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

The payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S709) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). Information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal plate 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the manner in which game balls are put out in the pachinko machine 10 according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97 . for example,
・Ball payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 until 100 game balls are discharged Ball rate (hereinafter referred to as "B")
・Ball output rate in open/close execution mode ・Ball output rate in high-frequency support mode "S")
・ BS x “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34”
・The number of game balls entering the first operation opening 33 until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
- The number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34 until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
・B-(S1דNumber of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33”+S2דNumber of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34”)
・Probability of occurrence of opening/closing execution mode per unit game time ・Probability of occurrence of high-frequency support mode per unit game time, etc. are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry portion.

<Structure for managing winning modes of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has a main CPU 63 , a main ROM 64 , a main RAM 65 and a management IC 66 . In addition to these, the MPU 62 has an I/F 101 as well as the already-described reading terminal 68d.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from equipment outside the MPU 62 . The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63 via the internal bus 103 . Through the input port of the I/F 101, detection results from sensors such as the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62, and based on the input detection results and command contents. Various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 as already described. In addition, when a signal is output to a device such as the drive unit 32b for a special electric as a result of various processing executed by the main side CPU 63, the signal is output through the output port of the I/F 101, and the main side As a result of execution of various processes by the CPU 63 , when command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81 , the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101 .

The management IC 66 includes a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, It has These devices are connected through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be bidirectionally communicable.

The management side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main side CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 68d via the terminal 68d for reading. Various signals from the main side CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111. FIG. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d via a signal path group 120 for two-way communication built in the MPU 62. FIG.

The management-side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside for storing data such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The management-side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management-side CPU 112 . The management-side RAM 114 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside for storage (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and has a shorter time required for reading than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113 .

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date information and time information, and outputs the measured date information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) in accordance with instructions from the management side CPU 112. It is a configuration that allows In addition, the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold data, and is used for both reading and writing. Correspondence memory 116 stores information about correspondence between buffers 122a to 122p provided at input port 121 of management side I/F 111 and types of signals input to buffers 122a to 122p. used for The details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require power supply from the outside (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding game history received from the main side CPU 63 through the management side I/F 111 . The details of the contents of history memory 117 will be described later.

The calculation result memory 131 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside to hold data such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The calculation result memory 131 is used to sequentially store various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 using history information stored in the history memory 117 . The contents of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c and output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. As shown in FIG.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a-122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through signal paths 118a to 118p. is at LOW level, information of "0" is stored as the first data, and information of "1" is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at HI level. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the first signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. A first signal of HI level is output for a specific period when a ball is detected. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal of HI level is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the second signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and one game is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. When a ball is detected, it outputs a second signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the second signal of HI level is input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the third signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a, and one game is detected by the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, it outputs a third signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal of HI level is input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the LOW level fourth signal when no new game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. to output a fourth signal of HI level over a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal of HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. When the ball is detected, a HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal of HI level is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a, and one game is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a. When a ball is detected, it outputs a sixth signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the sixth buffer 122f is receiving the HI level sixth signal.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the LOW level seventh signal in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. HI level seventh signal is output for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth buffer 122h receives an eighth signal corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in progress. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level eighth signal in the non-opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the opening/closing execution mode.

The ninth buffer 122i receives a ninth signal corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is set.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues to output the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. and output.

An eleventh signal corresponding to whether or not a game cycle has started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eleventh signal until the game round is started, and outputs the HI level eleventh signal for a specific period when the game round is started. do. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the 11th signal of HI level is input to the 11th buffer 122k.

A set value update signal is inputted to the fifteenth buffer 122o to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set by the main side CPU 63. FIG. In this case, the master side CPU 63 outputs a setting value update signal of LOW level when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not newly set, and when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Then, a HI-level set value update signal is output for a number of pulse signals corresponding to the newly set value for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to identify that the HI level set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

The sixteenth buffer 122p contains an output instruction signal for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the trigger for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d. is entered. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW-level output instruction signal when it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI-level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the 16th buffer 122p is receiving the HI level output instruction signal.

The twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m and the fourteenth buffer 122n can receive signals from the main side CPU 63, but in the pachinko machine 10, they are blank to which normal signals cannot be input. In this way, as the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, the number of buffers 122a to 122p larger than the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 is provided. It becomes possible to divert the management IC 66 to a model different from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 . Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, it is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the signal paths 118l to 118n are not formed between the buffers 122l to 122n to be blanked is also possible.

Input of the set value update signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o and input of the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p are determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and an instruction from the main CPU 63 is received. Instead, the management side CPU 112 can specify that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . Details of the types of these signals in the management side CPU 112 will be described later. This is done by transmitting a type identification command to the In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management side CPU 112 specifies the types of various signals in a state where operating power is being supplied, The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. As shown in FIG. Correspondence memory 116 has first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in one-to-one correspondence with first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided at input port 121 of management side I/F 111. is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is the general prize winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, there is information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31. Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 are displayed. Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, there is information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31. Stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, there is information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 and information (15 pieces) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32. Stored. Information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (one ) are also stored. Information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that it is the second operating port 34 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operating port 34 (one ) are also stored. The seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating the output port 24a as information for specifying the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g by the management CPU 112. FIG.

Information indicating the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h by the management CPU 112. FIG. Information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. Information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating the start of a game round as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any kind of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management side CPU 112 . The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management CPU 112. FIG.

As described above, the types of signals to be input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are specified by the management side CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main side CPU 63. , the management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

In addition, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, the type of the signal is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management side CPU 112 is stored in the correspondence memory 116 based on the output information. It is a configuration that As a result, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time a signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, the signal is output each time. It is possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 .

Information for identifying the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is output by the management CPU 112 at the start of supply of operating power. As a result, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, the management side CPU 112 can specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

Further, information setting indicating that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and information setting indicating that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are performed in the design stage of the management IC 66. FIG. As a result, not only the present pachinko machine 10 but also other types of pachinko machines using the management IC 66 can reliably use the set value update signal and the output instruction signal in the fifteenth buffer 122o and the sixteenth buffer 122p. It is possible to omit the processing for identifying the type of signal input to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for specifying the type of such signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be explained. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the structure of the history memory 117. As shown in FIG.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set with serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set corresponding to each piece of pointer information on a one-to-one basis. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing correspondence relationship information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store the correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (actually the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k in the case of the pachinko machine 10). , first stores the date and time information currently measured by the RTC 115 in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written currently. After that, the correspondence relation information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n in the correspondence relation memory 116, and the read correspondence relation information is stored in the area for storing correspondence relation information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written at present.

More specifically, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the types of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of ball entry corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a all detect game balls entering the general winning hole 31, so these first to third winning holes Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a is the general prize winning opening 31 is stored. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation port 33. , the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating the second operation port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating the out port 24a. If the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the current information storage are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the types of ball-entering sections corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g are the first to It is read out from any one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information of the type of ball entering portion is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 as it is.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input, and a signal indicating whether or not a game cycle has started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. Therefore, information indicating the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and tenth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the high frequency support mode. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j, and information indicating that it is a game cycle is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eighth signal in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in a situation in the opening/closing execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. becomes possible. When the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence relationship information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information are stored in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area for storing the correspondence relationship information. When the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read out from the eighth correspondence relationship area 123h but also the end information is stored in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area for storing the correspondence relationship information.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level ninth signal in a situation other than the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI level ninth signal in a situation in the high frequency support mode. , the management-side CPU 112 determines that the high-frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and terminates the high-frequency support mode when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It is possible to specify that When the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information is stored in the history information storage area. 125 is stored in an area for storing correspondence information. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information is stored in the history information storage area. 125 is stored in an area for storing correspondence information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. can identify that the front door frame 14 is closed. When the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information. Stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information in the area 125 . Further, when the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. Stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information in the area 125 .

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level eleventh signal until the game round start timing, and when the game round start timing comes, the HI level eleventh signal is output for a specific period. Output a signal. Therefore, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that a game round has started when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level. That is, when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the information indicating that it is a game cycle read from the eleventh correspondence area 123k is stored in the history information storage area 125 as the correspondence information. area.

The history information storage area 125 is capable of storing all the history information generated during the 10 business days in which game balls are continuously shot from the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It takes a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, the history information storage area 125 for 600,000 or more pieces is provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least ten days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separately from the history area 124 . The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify the pointer information currently being written in the history memory 117 . Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information designating the pointer information of "0" to be written. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the pointer information in the last order is to be written and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of "0" is to be written. The information in the use area 126 is updated. As a result, when the number of pieces of history information that can be stored exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, and a trigger for storing history information occurs, the history information storage area 125 in which the old pieces of history information are stored is overwritten with new pieces of history information in order. Become.

Also, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by an external device, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to "0" and the pointer information of "0" is written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information that has been read once from being read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing recognition processing executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9).

First, "14" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S801). The recognition output counter is the rest of the information output for making the management side CPU 112 recognize which kind of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 correspond to. is a counter for specifying the required number of times by the main side CPU 63 . As already explained, 14 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are subject to signal type recognition, so "14" is set in the recognition output counter.

Thereafter, an identification start command output process is executed (step S802). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 to make the management CPU 112 recognize which kind of signals the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. The first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used for this command output. That is, by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store history information, the first to fourteenth buffers 122a A command is output to make the management side CPU 112 recognize which kind of signal .about.122n corresponds to. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the signal paths for outputting the command are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. becomes possible and the configuration can be simplified. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. Also, the period during which the identification start command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification start command, the management side CPU 112 is instructed to start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the 1st to 14th buffers 122a to 122n are corresponded so that the first buffer 122a is the target of signal type setting first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target of signal type setting after the nth buffer. Recognition setting of the signal type to be used is performed. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "14" to "12", the type identification command indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and the number of prize balls is read, and if the output counter for recognition is "11", the special electric winning read a type identification command indicating that it is the device 32 and the number of prize balls; if the output counter for recognition is "10", read out a type identification command indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls; If the output counter for recognition is "9", it is the second working port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. If the output counter for recognition is "8", it is the out port 24a. If the output counter for recognition is "7", the type identification command indicating that it is in the opening/closing execution mode is read, and if the output counter for recognition is "6", it means that it is in the high frequency support mode. If the output counter for recognition is "5", the type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is read, and if the output counter for recognition is "4", it means that it is a game round. If the output counter for recognition is "3" to "1", the type identification command indicating blank is read.

After that, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification type command output processing, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification type command so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. Also, the period during which the identification type command output state and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these identification type command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification type command, the management side CPU 112 stores the corresponding identification type command in the correspondence area 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n. Stores information about

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S805), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement of 1 is "0" (step S806). When the value of the output counter for recognition is 1 or more (step S806: NO), processing for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the output counter for recognition after subtraction of 1 is executed (steps S803 and step S804).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S806: YES), output processing of an identification end command is executed (step S807). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification end command output process, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification end command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the period during which the identification end command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification end command, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started in the main side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is performed. is started, the combination of the processes after step S908 in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

First, it is determined whether or not an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). If the identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), after executing the setting update recognition process (step S902), the process returns to step S901. In the setting update recognition process, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by the main side CPU 63, the corresponding process is executed, although the details will be described later.

When the identification start command is received from the main side CPU 63 (step S901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S903). The setting target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffers 122a to 122n for which the type of signal is to be set. The first buffer 122a is the target of signal type setting first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target of signal type setting after the nth buffer.

Thereafter, on condition that the type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence memory 116, the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 is stored with the type identification received this time. Stores the signal type information set in the command. After that, 1 is added to the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S906).

When a negative determination is made in step S904, or when the process of step S906 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If the identification end command has not been received (step S907: NO), the process returns to step S904, and under the condition that the type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), steps S905 and S906 Execute the process again.

If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907: YES), the processing of steps S908 to S910 is repeatedly executed. In step S908, although the details will be described later, history setting processing for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S909, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation results are reported by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, although the details will be described later. Execute display output processing for In step S910, although the details will be described later, an external output process is executed for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d.

FIG. 24 is a time chart showing how information on correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n is stored in the correspondence memory . FIG. 24(a) shows a period during which commands are output from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is HI level, and FIG. FIG. 24D shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, and FIG.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, an identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started to be output at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 24(a). be. At the timing t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). After that, at timing t2 in which the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information of . In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S901 of the management processing (FIG. 23) to enter the identification state. After that, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 24(a), output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started. At the timing t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). After that, at timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 24(d). In the correspondence setting process, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information on the number of prize balls is stored in the first correspondence area 123 a of the correspondence memory 116 . After that, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

After that, at timing t7 to timing t9, timing t10 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t15, and timing t16 to timing t18, similarly to timing t4 to timing t6, the main Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the 14th type identification command is completed between timing t16 and timing t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 24(a), the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. At the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). After that, at timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing t20 as shown in FIG. 24(c). After that, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

In order to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information by using the configuration that allows the management side CPU 112 to recognize whether or not a command is being output using the ninth signal as described above. Clearly to the management side CPU 112 that commands are being output even in a configuration in which commands are output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) to be used. It is possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the management output process is executed at step S319 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, "11" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1001). The managed object counter specifies whether or not there is a managed object that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process, by the main CPU 63. In addition, it is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed for any of the managed objects. In one management output process, the management targets for which the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to change the signal output state to the management CPU 112 are the seven ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 11 items including whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is executed, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed, whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened and closed, and whether or not the game cycle is started. Therefore, "11" is set to the managed counter first.

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S1002). If it is not HI level (step S1002: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the managed object counter is 5 or more, so that there are seven entering ball detection sensors 42a that are managed objects corresponding to the value of the managed object counter. to 48a (step S1003).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1004). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "11" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1", When the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is determined. is "9" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "8". If it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", the value of the managed counter is "7", and the first operation opening detection sensor 46a , it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1". If the sixth output flag is set to "1" or not, and if the value of the managed counter is "5" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to " 1” is set. As already described, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed is set to "1" (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S1005). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S1006).

If a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed to HI level (step S1007). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "4", it is determined whether or not the transition to the open/close execution mode has occurred. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and if the value of the managed counter is "2", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and the managed counter is When the value is "1", it is determined whether or not the game round has been started by determining whether or not the 11th output flag is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S1008). When the value of the managed counter is "1" and the process of step S1008 is executed, the eleventh output flag is cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed to LOW level (step S1009). Specifically, when the value of the managed object counter is 5 or more or "1" and the current managed object is one of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a or the start of the game round, the first to seventh signals It is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed after switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the 11th signals from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S908) of the management process (FIG. 23) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This period allows the management CPU 112 to reliably identify the state. If the value of the managed object counter is "4" and the current managed object is in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed object counter is "3". If the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management target counter is "2", and the current management target is the front door frame 14. If so, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is closed. If there is an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to LOW level (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to LOW level ( step S1010).

If a negative determination is made in step S1004, if the process of step S1006 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S1007, if the process of step S1008 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S1009, or step When the process of S1010 is executed, the value of the managed counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1012). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the process after step S1002 is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new value of the managed object counter.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, so in step S1101 "11" is set in the check target counter. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1102). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122n are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "11", the eleventh buffer 122k is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S1103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 . Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current check target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, if the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open/close execution mode, the information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123n becomes the read target of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "11", the eleventh correspondence area 123k is the target of reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence It becomes a target for reading information.

By executing the writing process as described above, the value of the check target counter is one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34, and the game round , the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written contains the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33, the second A combination of the operation port 34 and the correspondence information indicating that it is one of the game rounds is stored as history information. When the value of the check target counter is any of the open/close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Then, the combination of the correspondence information indicating any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the start information is stored as history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1105). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, or if the process of step S1105 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level is checked in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current confirmation target counter value. It is determined whether or not correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S1106). Specifically, when the current value of the confirmation target counter is "8" to "10", information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in the corresponding correspondence area 123h to 123j, Since either the information indicating that there is one or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1106.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is changed from "1" to "0". It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from HI level to LOW level (step S1107). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, the RTC information is read (step S1108) as in step S1103, and the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1109). In the write process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current check target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, not only the correspondence relationship information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the pointer information to be written corresponds to the pointer information. A history information storage area 125 stores, as history information, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and end information. state. After that, similar to step S1105, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1110).

When a negative determination is made in step S1106, when a negative determination is made in step S1107, or when the process of step S1110 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1112). When the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S1112: NO), the process after step S1102 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 27(a) shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to any one of the first to seventh, eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k, and FIG. 27(c) shows a period during which a HI level signal is inputted to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 27(d) shows a period during which a HI level signal is inputted to the tenth buffer 122j. is input, and FIG. 27E shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117. FIG.

At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 27(a), the output state of the signal input to any one of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from LOW level to HI level. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 27(e). After that, at the timing of t2, the signal that was switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 27(a). However, since this signal is input to any one of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and switching of the LOW level is not an object to store history information, At the timing, the history information is not written as shown in FIG. 27(e).

After that, as shown in FIG. 27(a), at each of the timings t3, t5, t6, t9, t10, t13 and t14, the first to seventh 11 buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, the output state of the signal input is switched from LOW level to HI level. Accordingly, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 27(e).

As shown in FIG. 27(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the open/close execution mode is generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is switched to HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117 .

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into a hole is during the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 27(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is HI level from timing t8 to timing t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high frequency support mode is generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing t8 at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117 .

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is included in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not In addition, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into a ball during the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 27(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing t12 at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level The history information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t15 includes end information. Accordingly, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 indicates that the front door frame 14 is open. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is a thing or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into one is during the opening of the front door frame 14 .

Next, the output processing of the setting value update signal executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main side CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing output processing of the set value update signal executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. Note that output processing of the set value update signal is executed in step S119 in the main processing (FIG. 9).

A value corresponding to the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is set in the pulse number counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the set value counter of the main side RAM 65 is set in the pulse number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting value update signal directed to the management side CPU 112 is at HI level (step S1202). As already explained, the set value update signal is inputted to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the IC 66 for management. Here, the output processing of the setting value update signal is processing for causing the management side CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main processing (FIG. 9). It is executed before certain recognition processing. On the other hand, since it is set in the management IC 66 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, the set value update signal is output before the recognition process. Even if the process is executed, it becomes possible for the management side CPU 112 to identify that the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is the set value update signal.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1203), and whether or not the value of the LOW level counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0". (step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to determine whether or not the set value update signal has been maintained at the LOW level for a predetermined period while the set value update signal outputs a plurality of pulses in which the set value update signal is at HI level. is. If the value of the LOW level counter is "0" (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the setting value update signal to HI level. Set (step S1205).

After that, the HI level counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "20" (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the period during which the set value update signal is maintained at HI level. Since the value set in the HI level counter is decremented by 1 at intervals of about 10 microseconds, the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level for 200 microseconds when one pulse is output. This HI level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from LOW level to HI level.

If the setting value update signal is HI level (step S1202: YES), the value of the HI level counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1207), and the value of the HI level counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0". It is determined whether or not (step S1208). If the value of the HI level counter is "0" (step S1208: YES), it means that it is time to set the setting value update signal to LOW level. Set (step S1209).

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the pulse number counter value of the main RAM 65 (step S1210), and it is determined whether or not the pulse number counter value after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1211). If the value of the pulse number counter is not "0" (step S1211: NO), the output of the pulse signal by the setting value update signal for the number corresponding to the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has been completed. Since it means that there is no data, "20" is set in the LOW level counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1212). Since the value set in the LOW level counter is decremented by 1 at intervals of about 10 microseconds, it is maintained at the LOW level for 200 microseconds between a plurality of pulse outputs by the set value update signal. This LOW level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from HI level to LOW level.

When the value of the pulse number counter is "0" (step S1211: YES), the output of the pulse signal by the set value update signal for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has been completed. Therefore, output processing of a set value identification end command is executed (step S1213). The setting value identification end command is a command for making the management side CPU 112 recognize that the output of the setting value update signal for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. When outputting the set value identification end command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used in the same way as the identification start command, type identification command and identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the setting value identification end command is different from those of the identification start command, the type identification command and the identification end command.

As described above, in the setting value update signal output process, a pulse signal corresponding to the number of setting value update signals for the pachinko machine 10 set at the start of supply of operating power this time is output to the management IC 66. do. By executing the setting update recognition process, the management side CPU 112 grasps the number of pulse signals by the setting value update signal, and grasps the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time based on it.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 23).

It is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level (step S1301). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S1303). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, 1 is added to the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S1304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S1303 or if the process of step S1304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121, , determines whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1305). If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process returns to step S1303.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S1306 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 . Also, both the information for identifying the set value and the information of the value of the set value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed. The combination is stored as history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1308). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

By executing the setting update recognition process as described above, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the fact that the setting was made, the date and time when the setting was made, and the A combination of set values when settings are made is stored in the history area 124 as history information. As a result, by reading and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 using an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was newly set and the relevant setting are It is possible to grasp the contents of the set values when the setting is performed.

Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. As a result, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased. It is calculated using the history information that exists before and after. In this case, since the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was newly set as described above is stored in the history memory 117, it is stored in the history memory 117 by connecting an external device to the reading terminal 68d. By reading the information, it is possible to calculate various parameters in the period after the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting state is maintained.

Next, the display output processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, it is determined whether or not it is the calculation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have elapsed since the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 was started, or if 51 seconds have elapsed since the previous affirmative determination was made in step S1401, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the number of different types of ball hits during normal times is calculated (step S1402). Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, Calculate the number of incoming balls. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball entering the general winning opening 31 is counted. Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 that store correspondence information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the winning ball to the special electric prize winning device 32 is counted. Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, Calculate the number of incoming balls. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, Calculate the number of incoming balls.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information, and the correspondence relationship indicating that it is the front door frame 14 By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out exit that occurred in the situation where the front door frame 14 was open 24a, the number of balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1403). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information, which is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information and the correspondence indicating the front door frame 14 If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is present. is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the end information are not stored, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as that in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1402 and S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1403 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1402. Then, the following 1st to 8th parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1402 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1403 is defined as the number of balls entering K1. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K2, and the special electric prize winning device calculated in step S1403 relative to the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1402. 32 is defined as the number of entered balls K3, and the difference between the number of entered balls through the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1403 and the number of balls entered into the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1402 is defined as the number of entered balls K3. The difference between the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1403 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1402 is defined as the number of entering balls K5.
・First parameter: total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "first operation opening 33 "Number of prize balls for winning" + K5 × "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from skill area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as " D1”)
・Second parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K2 entering general winning hole 31/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) Ratio of the total number of game balls K3 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Fourth parameter: total number of game balls K4 into the first operation port 33 / discharged from the game area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as "D2")
· Fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number K5 of game balls entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3")
・Sixth parameter: D1-(D2 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general The number of prize balls for winning to the winning opening 31" + K3 × "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34 8th parameter: K3 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32''/Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x `` "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) In step S 1404 , the first to eighth parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the normal storage area of the calculation result memory 131 . The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal storage area are retained until step S1404 is executed next time. That is, when the next step S1404 is executed and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal storage area. The previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters stored in the normal storage area are overwritten.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and the start information, the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, and the start information are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 that stores the end information, the out port 24a and the general winning port 31 that occurred in the open/close execution mode , the number of balls entering each of the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S1405). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode. is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, the history information storage area 125 stores the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, and the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 that stores start information and correspondence information indicating that the open/close execution mode is present, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is not stored. If the history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and the end information, the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and the start information are stored. Any of the history information in the history information storage area 125 that stores the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is treated as in the open/close execution mode.

After that, during the period of the opening and closing execution mode specified in step S1405, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the The number of balls entering each of the second operating holes 34 is calculated (step S1406). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as in step S1403, except that the period of the open/close execution mode specified in step S1405 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1405 and S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1406 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1405. Then, the following 11th to 18th parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1405 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1406 is defined as the number of balls entering K11. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K12, and the special electric prize winning device calculated in step S1406 relative to the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1405. 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K13, and the difference between the number of entering balls into the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1406 and the number of entering balls into the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1405 is defined as the number of entering balls K13. The difference between the number of balls entering the second working opening 34 calculated in step S1406 and the number of balls entering the second working opening 34 calculated in step S1405 is defined as the number of entering balls K14.
11th parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K13 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "first operation opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereafter, this ratio is referred to as " D11”)
・Twelfth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K12 entering general winning port 31/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) The ratio of the total number of game balls K13 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) 14th parameter: The total number of game balls K14 into the first operation port 33 / discharged from the game area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as "D12")
· Fifteenth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K15 entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D13")
16th parameter: D11-(D12 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning to winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of winning balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K15 x "Second operation opening 34" 18th parameter: K13 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32'' / Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x ``For winning to general winning port 31 Number of prize balls" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) In step S 1407 , the 11th to 18th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the memory area for opening/closing execution mode in the calculation result memory 131 . The 11th to 18th parameters stored in the storage area for the opening/closing execution mode are retained until the next step S1407 is executed. That is, when the next step S1407 is executed and the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 11th to 18th parameters are stored in the open/close execution mode storage area. , the previous calculation results of the 11th to 18th parameters stored in the open/close execution mode storage area are overwritten.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information, and the correspondence relationship indicating the high-frequency support mode By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and end information are stored, the out exit 24a that occurred in the high-frequency support mode, general The number of balls entering each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1408). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information and the correspondence relationship indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored in the entirety of the consecutively numbered pointer information. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 that stores correspondence relationship information indicating that the high-frequency support mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is present. is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the end information are not stored, the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information are stored. Any of the history information in the history information storage area 125 that stores RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 that is set is treated as that in the high-frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operation port 33 generated in the state where the front door frame 14 is open and the number of balls entered into each of the second working openings 34 (step S1409). The method of calculating the number of hits is the same as in step S1403, except that the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1408 and S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1409 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1408. Then, the following 21st to 26th parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1408 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1409 is defined as the number of balls entering K21. The difference between the number of balls and the number of balls entering the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1409 is defined as the number of entering balls K22, and the special electric winning device calculated in step S1409 relative to the number of entering balls of the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1408. 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K23, and the difference between the number of entering balls into the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1409 and the number of entering balls into the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1408 is defined as the number of entering balls K23. The difference between the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1409 and the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1408 is defined as the number of entering balls K24.
21st parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K23 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "first operation opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereafter, this ratio is referred to as " D11”)
22nd parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 K22/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) 24th parameter: total number of game balls K24/discharged from the game area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as "D22")
· 25th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K25 entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D23")
26th parameter: D21-(D22 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
In step S1410, the 21st to 26th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the memory area for the high-frequency support mode in the calculation result memory 131. FIG. The twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. That is, when the next step S1410 is executed and the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 21st to 26th parameters are stored in the high frequency support mode storage area. Then, the calculation results of the previous 21st to 26th parameters stored in the storage area for the high-frequency support mode are overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the open/close execution mode is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the opening/closing execution mode is determined. Calculate the number of occurrences of In addition, the number of occurrences of game rounds is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating the start of game rounds is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. . Then, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game is calculated. The number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode is defined as the number of times of occurrence K31, and the number of times of occurrence of the game cycle is defined as the number of times of occurrence K32.
・The 31st parameter: K31/K32
In step S1411, the 31st parameter, which is the calculation result, is stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. FIG. The thirty-first parameter stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area is retained until step S1411 is executed next time. That is, when the next step S1411 is executed and the 31st parameter is calculated, the newly calculated 31st parameter is stored in the open/close execution mode frequency storage area, and the opening/closing execution mode is maintained until then. The previous calculation result of the 31st parameter stored in the frequency storage area is overwritten.

After that, the occurrence frequency of the high frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence relationship information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the high-frequency support mode is stored. Calculate the number of occurrences of support mode. In addition, the number of occurrences of game rounds is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating the start of game rounds is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. . Then, the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game time and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode are calculated. The number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode is K41, the number of game rounds is K42, and the opening/closing execution mode calculated in step S1411 is K43.
・The 41st parameter: K41/K42
・42nd parameter: K41/K43
In step S1412, the 41st to 42nd parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. FIG. The 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next step S1412 is executed. That is, when the next step S1412 is executed and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 41st to 42nd parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area are overwritten.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, or if the processing of step S1412 is executed, display processing is executed (step S1413). FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing display processing.

First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the timing of updating the display contents of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management side CPU 112 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to display the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first Parameters and calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters are reported. In this case, information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified is displayed on the first notification display device 69a. Further, of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed for the third notification display. Displayed on device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters and the forty-first to The display corresponding to the calculation result of the 42nd parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the last order display object, is displayed, the first order display object is displayed. The calculation result of one parameter is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is two seconds.

Here, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds. On the other hand, the number of various parameters is 25, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are to be displayed on the first to third display devices 69a to 69c at least once.

When the processing of step S1501 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0". It is determined whether or not it is time to do so (step S1502). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, 1 is added to the value of the display target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1503). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "24" (step S1504: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S1505).

The display target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the types of parameters to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameters, the 41st to 42nd parameters, and the display target counters of "0" to "24" There is a one-to-one correspondence with the possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter to be displayed first becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is "24". , the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

When a negative determination is made in step S1504, or when the process of step S1505 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so as to display information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed. control (step S1506). Further, a parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result memory 131, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and a number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, A number corresponding to the ones place is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The contents displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in steps S1506 and S1507 are continued until the next update timing or until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is stopped. be. Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management RAM 114 as the value corresponding to the next update timing (step S1508).

By executing the display processing as described above, when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started, the game history management result is displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. be done. The display of the management result of the game history is performed regardless of whether the game is continued or not. This is done regardless of whether it is visible or not. Thus, by executing the display control of the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c regardless of the game situation and the state of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third information display devices 69a 69c can be simplified.

The display of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is started after the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63. be done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, just like the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set when the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the information corresponding to the set value being changed is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. However, while the information corresponding to the set value is displayed before the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is displayed. The display of the management result of is started after the main side CPU 63 transmits an identification end command. As a result, even if the third notification display device 69c is configured to be used both as a display device for displaying information corresponding to the set value and for displaying the management result of the game history, it is possible to display these displays. It is possible to prevent periods from overlapping.

Further, when the information corresponding to the set value is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not displayed. On the other hand, when the game history management result is being displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not hidden. This makes it possible to identify which of the display of information corresponding to the set value and the display of the management result of the game history is being performed on the third notification display device 69c.

Next, a processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. explain. FIG. 32(a) is a flow chart showing data output processing executed by the main side CPU 63. FIG. The data output process is executed at step S112 in the main process (FIG. 9).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d has been received from the reading terminal 68d (step S1601). If a negative determination is made in step S1601, the data output processing ends. In this case, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 must be restarted in order to execute the data output process. Thus, in order to externally output history information and various parameters, supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 should be started while an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. need to be A power switch for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is provided in the payout mechanism 73 mounted on the rear surface of the back pack unit 15. In order to do so, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11 to expose the rear surface of the back pack unit 15 . Under these circumstances, in order to externally output history information and various parameters, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. It is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the manager of the game hall to read the history information and various parameters.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the current connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is determined by determining whether or not a control information confirmation signal is received from the reading terminal 68d. (step S1602). The external device is configured to be able to perform both confirmation of control information and confirmation of history information and various parameters. A signal for confirming control information is transmitted, and when confirmation of history information and various parameters is selected by manual operation of the external device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device. The configuration is not limited to this, and the external device for checking control information and the external device for checking history may be separate. In this case, when an external device for checking the control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, a signal for checking the control information is transmitted from the external device, and an external device for checking the history is sent to the reading terminal 68d. When the device is electrically connected, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S1603). In the output process, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, the control information can be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and it is possible to check whether the control information is legitimate or normal. It is possible to do

If a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the 16th buffer 122p is receiving the HI level output instruction signal. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, management-side CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32(b), when the output state of the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 is switched from LOW level to HI level, the management side CPU 112 (Step S1701: YES), the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read, and the read history information and various parameters are output to the reading terminal 68d. (Step S1702). As a result, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the information of the management result of the game history can be analyzed. When the management CPU 112 outputs the history information to the reading terminal 68d, it clears the history memory 117 to "0" (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is erased only when the history information is read by an external device.

Returning to the description of the data output process (FIG. 32(a)), when the process of step S1603 or the process of step S1604 is performed, the electrical connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d continues. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S1605). If it is continued (step S1605: YES), it stands by at step S1605. This makes it possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released. When the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is canceled (step S1605: NO), this data output process is terminated.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the game ball is paid out when the game ball enters any one of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, the player can enter any of these ball entering parts The game is played while expecting that the game ball will enter the ball. In this configuration, the entry of a game ball into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entering section) occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 . As a result, it becomes possible for the pachinko machine 10 to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering each history target ball entering portion or the frequency of entering the ball, and the managed information is used. As a result, it is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters each history target ball entering section. Further, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the history information.

All the ball-entering units that discharge game balls from the game area PA are subject to execution of history information storage processing and subject to management using history information. This makes it possible to manage the ball-entering frequency for any history-targeted ball-entering club using the history information. In addition, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball entering section to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the history target ball-entering portion that triggered the storage of the history information. As a result, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the history of the game ball entering the history target ball entering section.

The history memory 117 stores not only history information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the history target ball entry portion, but also history information indicating whether the open/close execution mode is in progress, and whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress. and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open. As a result, it is possible to distinguish whether or not each of these situations exists, and to manage the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entering section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to an external device, which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, it becomes possible to read the history information by the external device and analyze the manner of entry of the game ball into the history target ball entry section using the read history information.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and the program can be read from the main ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Either the program or the history information is specified as the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d, and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 68d. As a result, in the configuration in which the history information is externally output using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program, the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether the information to be externally output is either the program or the history information. is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even if the reading terminal 68d is also used, it is possible to read out only the necessary information.

Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is the program or history information. This makes it possible to avoid complicating the configuration regarding the selection of information to be externally output.

An MPU 62 having a main-side ROM 64 storing programs in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to concentrate the signal paths for the reading terminal 68 d within the MPU 62 . Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 68d difficult.

A main side CPU 63 that executes a process for paying out a game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34. Separately, a management side CPU 112 is provided, and the management side CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117 . As a result, it becomes possible to manage the manner of entry of game balls into the respective history object entry sections while preventing the processing load of the main side CPU 63 from excessively increasing.

The main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62 . This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 .

The main side CPU 63 stores the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a in each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. 122a-122g. As a result, the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 correspond to the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, the respective signal paths), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing the types of information in the management CPU 112. It becomes possible to

The main CPU 63 receives information corresponding to whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened, and the information corresponding to the start of the game cycle are transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each situation corresponds to each of the buffers 122h to 122k (that is, each signal path), thereby simplifying the configuration for distinguishing between the types of information in the management CPU 112. becomes possible.

The master side CPU 63 transmits to the management side CPU 112 correspondence relationship information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122k (that is, each signal path 118a to 118k) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . As a result, in a situation where a game ball may enter the history-targeted ball-entering portion, the management IC 66 can specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history-targeted ball-entering portion. It is possible to make it

Using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry portion, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This makes it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting correspondence information.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116 , and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116 . As a result, every time the main side CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted. no longer need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main side CPU 63. FIG.

When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from LOW level to HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence relation information from the main side CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. It is As a result, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with the situation without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d, each piece of history information includes correspondence information indicating the type of the history target ball-entering club corresponding to the history information. As a result, it is possible to specify the entry mode of the game ball into each history target ball entry section by using the read history information.

By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh 18th parameter, 21st to 26th parameter, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameter) are calculated. Various parameters resulting from these calculations are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. As a result, it becomes possible for the pachinko machine 10 to notify various parameters that are the result of calculation using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated while excluding the history information corresponding to the situation in which the front door frame 14 is being opened. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Further, various parameters corresponding to each of the conditions of the open/close execution mode and the condition of the high-frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball according to each situation.

When the history information in the history memory 117 is output to an external device, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing clearing processing of the history memory 117 . As a result, history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should be stored and held is erased by overwriting. It is possible to make it difficult to generate

History information is stored in the history memory 117 in a configuration in which an external output corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is performed through the external terminal plate 97. . As a result, by using the information output to the outside through the external terminal plate 97, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 and the frequency of entering the game ball can be easily grasped. By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the history target ball entering section and the frequency of entering the ball.

In the low-probability mode, the probability of a big win result fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, even with a single pachinko machine 10, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of a jackpot result is advantageous or disadvantageous in the low-probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The probability of a big win result in the low probability mode fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6", while the probability of a big win result in the high probability mode is set by the pachinko machine 10. It does not change depending on the state. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 on the probability of a jackpot result to the situation in the low-probability mode. In addition, since it is possible to make the high accuracy table 64g referred to in the high probability mode common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the table 64a to 64g is stored in advance in the main ROM It is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storing.

In the low-probability mode, the probability of the jackpot result fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6", while the distribution mode of the type of jackpot result depends on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. does not change accordingly. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the situation in the low-probability mode. In addition, since it is possible to make the distribution table 64h referred to when distributing the types of jackpot results common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the distribution table 64h is stored in the main ROM 64. It is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity for storing in advance.

Even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased. Thus, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history memory 117, and the history memory can be maintained for a long period of time. Using the history information accumulated in 117, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set in a configuration in which the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. is performed, history information corresponding to it is stored in history memory 117 . As a result, it is possible to distinguish between the history information before the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the history information after the setting is made.

When the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the history memory 117, the information corresponding to the setting value is included in the history information. This makes it possible to identify the contents of the setting values that were set in the past by referring to the history information.

When calculating various parameters at the time of calculation, the history information stored after the history information corresponding to the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 is used as a reference. may be configured to calculate various parameters. In this case, it is possible to derive the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set as various parameters.

Also, when calculating various parameters at the calculation timing, history information corresponding to new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 and corresponding to change of the setting value is used as a reference. , and the history information stored after that may be used to calculate various parameters. In this case, it is possible to derive the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed as various parameters.

Also, although the circuit board box 60a of the main controller 60 is provided with an opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d, the opening is not provided and the reading terminal 69d is located on the opposite wall 60b. It is good also as a structure covered with. In this case, it is necessary to open the board box 60a in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the contents of the win/fail table corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are different from those in the first embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main ROM 64 has an area 161 for setting 1, an area 162 for setting 2, an area 163 for setting 3, an area 164 for setting 4, an area 165 for setting 5, and an area for setting 6. 166 and are provided. In the area 161 for setting 1, a low probability table 161a for setting 1 to be referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 and a high-probability table 161b for setting 1, which is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 1" and the win-or-fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the area 162 for setting 2, a low probability table 162a for setting 2, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 and a high-probability table 162b for setting 2 that is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 2" and the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the setting 3 area 163, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3" and the winning/failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, the low probability table 163a for the setting 3 referred to, and the pachinko machine 10 and a high-probability table 163b for setting 3, which is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 3" and the win-or-fail lottery mode is the high probability mode.

In the area 164 for setting 4, a low probability table 164a for setting 4, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 and a high-probability table 164b for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 4" and the win-or-fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the area 165 for setting 5, a low probability table 165a for setting 5, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 and a high-probability table 165b for setting 5 that is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 5" and the win-or-fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the area 166 for setting 6, a low probability table 166a for setting 6, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 and a high-probability table 166b for setting 6, which is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 6" and the win-or-fail lottery mode is the high probability mode.

Winning probabilities of the jackpot result set in each of the low certainty tables 161a to 166a are different from each other. Specifically, when the low certainty table 161a for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/320, and when the low certainty table 162a for setting 2 is referred, about 1/310. When the low certainty table 163a for setting 3 is referred to, the big winning result is about 1/300, and when the low certainty table 164a for setting 4 is referred, about 1/290. When the low probability table 165a for setting 5 is referred to, the result is about 1/280, and when the low probability table 166a for setting 6 is referred, about 1/270. result in a big hit. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting value, it becomes easier for a large winning result to occur in the low-probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

Winning probabilities of the jackpot result set in each of the high probability tables 161b to 166b are different from each other. Specifically, when the high certainty table 161b for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/45, and when the high certainty table 162b for setting 2 is referred, about 1/40 When the high probability table 163b for setting 3 is referred to, the result is about 1/35, and when the high probability table 164b for setting 4 is referred, the result is about 1/30. When the high probability table 165b for setting 5 is referred to, the result is about 1/25, and when the high probability table 166b for setting 6 is referred, the result is about 1/20. result in a big hit. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting value, it becomes easier to generate a big win result in the high-probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

That is, in the first embodiment, the higher the set value of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode is "setting 1". Although it is configured to be common in any setting state of ~ "Setting 6", in this embodiment, both the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode and the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode are the pachinko The higher the setting value of the machine 10, the higher the setting value. This makes it possible to increase the player's advantage over the fact that a high set value is set.

In addition, even if the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode in the case of "setting 6", which is the highest setting state, is the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode in the case of "setting 1", which is the lowest setting state. It is set lower than probability. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely low when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". It is possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely high in the case of "6".

On the other hand, the sorting table 64h is provided with only one type so as to be common to any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6", as in the first embodiment. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from producing an advantage or a disadvantage in the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and the memory capacity for pre-storing the distribution table 64h in the main side ROM 64.例文帳に追加can be suppressed.

The winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher. A configuration in which the set value is lower may be adopted. In this case, in the low-probability mode, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous it is to the player, and in the high-probability mode, the lower the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous it is to the player. becomes possible.

Further, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode is higher when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode is "setting 1" to "setting 6". ] may be set constant. In this case, in the high-probability mode, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous it is for the player, and in the low-probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not advantageous or disadvantageous. Become.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the handling of the game history management results when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The management IC 66 is provided with a separate storage memory 171 in addition to each memory in the first embodiment as a memory for storing information. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. As shown in FIG. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require power supply from the outside (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing.

The separate storage memory 171 is provided with a first separate storage area 172 , a second separate storage area 173 , a third separate storage area 174 , a fourth separate storage area 175 and a fifth separate storage area 176 . In these first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, information on the management result of the game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, more specifically in the first embodiment. (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st to 42nd parameters) described in 1. above are sequentially stored. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are first stored in the first separate storage area 172, and thereafter each time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the n-th separate Storage areas 172 to 176→(n+1)th different storage areas 172 to 176, the areas to be stored are switched. When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set after the various parameters are stored in the fifth separate storage area 176, the various parameters are stored again in the first separate storage area 172.例文帳に追加At this time, various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are erased. As a result, the various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 until the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is executed five times, and the oldest various parameters are erased after five times. It is remembered by

Various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the setting state is newly set in the pachinko machine 10 .

Next, the setting update recognition processing according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S1801: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". Set (step S1802). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S1803). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, 1 is added to the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S1804). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803, or if the process of step S1804 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121, , determines whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1805). If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, repeated change monitoring processing is executed (step S1806). In the repeated change monitoring process, details of which will be described later, but when new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 occur repeatedly in a short period of time, a process for notifying it is executed. In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the management result of the game history in the case where the game is played for a predetermined period is intended. It is assumed that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to erase the setting automatically. On the other hand, by executing the repeated change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, a notification corresponding to it is executed.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S1807). In the various arithmetic processing, the processing of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output processing (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters and 41st to the 42nd parameter) are calculated.

After that, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the current storage target area among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1808). A pointer information area is set in the separate storage memory 171 so that the management side CPU 112 can specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 . The information in the pointer information area is set so that when various parameters are stored in the area targeted for storage among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage target is changed to the next area. is updated to By executing the process of step S1808, various parameters at that point in time for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the separate storage memory 171. FIG.

Thereafter, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). That is, in this embodiment, not only when the history information is read by an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory 117 history information is erased.

Thereafter, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1810). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S1810 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. FIG. Also, both the information for identifying the set value and the information of the value of the set value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed. The combination is stored as history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1812). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the repeated change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of times the game has been executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is within the reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of the game round is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of games played since the state was set last time is grasped, and it is further determined whether or not the grasped number of games is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, 1 is added to the value of the repetition change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 (step S1902). Since the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require power supply from the outside to hold data as already described, it does not require power supply from the outside to hold the value of the repeat change counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value of "5" (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171 . Therefore, in step S1903, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening execution of game rounds exceeding the reference number of times exceeds the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not the threshold is exceeded.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, display processing for repetitive changes is executed (step S1904). In the repetitive change display processing, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c correspond to the fact that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated the number of times exceeding the notification reference value in a short period of time. Display content for repeated changes. The display content of the repeated change is the display content of displaying "E" on all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. Further, the state in which the repeated change display contents are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c continues until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0". . The repetitive change flag is a flag for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the display contents of repetitive change should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when the repetitive change flag is set to "1" and the repetitive change display contents are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display processing in the first embodiment is performed. (FIG. 31) is not executed. After that, the repeat change flag of the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1905).

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repetition change counter in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0" (step S1906). Thereafter, on condition that the repetitive change flag of the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1907: YES), the repetitive change display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are changed. The display is terminated (step S1908), and the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S1909).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased. As a result, it is possible to leave in the history memory 117 the history information of the game executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information of the history memory 117 at that time is used to calculate various parameters as the game history management results. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting state is newly set in the pachinko machine 10 . Further, even if the history information in the history memory 117 is erased when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history by the history information to be erased. It becomes possible.

In the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memory 117 at that point in time when a new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the calculated various parameters are stored in a separate storage memory. 171. As a result, even if the setting state is newly set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting is performed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

By providing a plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176 in the separate storage memory 171, it is possible to store various parameters corresponding to the setting timings of the setting state for a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management results of the game history in a plurality of periods based on the timing at which the setting state is newly set. In addition, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated under the situation where the game is not played, various parameters calculated using the history information of the situation where the game is actually played It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in the separate storage memory 171 .

Various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the setting state is newly set in the pachinko machine 10 .

In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the management result of the game history in the case where the game is played for a predetermined period is intended. It is assumed that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to erase the setting automatically. On the other hand, by executing the repeated change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, a notification corresponding to it is executed. As a result, it is possible to notify the administrator or the like that the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

Notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeated in a short period of time is performed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. As a result, by using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history, the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time. Notification can be made.

In a situation where it is necessary to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c continue to display the display contents of repeated changes. , the management result of the game history in the normal time is not notified by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This makes it possible to emphasize the notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

In addition, when the number of game rounds executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value. However, it is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In a situation where the number is within the reference number, if the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be performed. In addition, after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, or a predetermined Combination) In a situation where the total number of discharged game balls that entered the ball is within the reference number, if the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. good. In addition, in a situation where the total number of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number, the event of the new setting being performed is notified. A configuration may be adopted in which, when the reference value is continuously exceeded, the notification corresponding to it is executed.

Further, when the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed exceeding the notification reference value within the monitoring reference period (for example, 600 seconds), the corresponding notification may be executed.

In addition, when the number of game rounds executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value. However, the setting value is changed in a situation where the number of game rounds executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number of times. A configuration may be adopted in which, when events continue to exceed the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed.

In addition, when the number of game rounds executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value. However, the new setting is triggered in a situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, when events for which various parameters are calculated continue exceeding the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed.

In addition, when the number of game rounds executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value. However, in addition to or instead of this, the progress of the game may be restricted for a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

<Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the third embodiment in that the main CPU 63 executes the repeated change monitoring process. The configuration that is different from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing a repeated change monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. Note that the repeated change monitoring process is executed when the set value update process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 9). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the repeated change monitoring process is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the change monitoring process is repeatedly executed when the set value is changed.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of times the game has been executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is within the reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) (step S2001). The main side RAM 65 is provided with a game number counter for measuring the number of times the game is executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, and the main side CPU 63 detects when the game is newly executed. The value of the number-of-games counter is incremented by 1 each time the game is played. The number-of-games counter is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the clearing process (step S105, step S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, 1 is added to the value of the repetition change counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2002). The repetitive change counter is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the clearing process (steps S105 and S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetitive change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value of "5" (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171 . Therefore, in step S2003, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeated without intervening execution of game times exceeding the reference number of times exceeds the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not the threshold is exceeded.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the repeat change flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2004). The repetitive change flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the repetitive change should be notified. The repetitive change flag is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the clearing process (steps S105 and S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repetition change counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2005). Thereafter, on condition that the repeat change flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2006: YES), the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S2007).

In the repetitive change monitoring process, if the repetitive change flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2008: YES), a repetitive change notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S2009). When the sound emission control device 81 receives the repetitive change notification command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 are made to repeatedly notify the change. Notification of the repeated change is continued until the supply of operating power to the sound emission control device 81 is stopped.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time based on the control by the main side CPU 63 . In addition, since the notification is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed without opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward with respect to the outer frame 11. It is possible to make the administrator recognize that new settings have been repeatedly made in a short period of time.

In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the notification command for repeated change is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81 when the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, A configuration in which corresponding external output is performed may be employed.

Further, the main CPU 63 may be configured to execute the repetitive change monitoring process in this embodiment, and the management side CPU 112 may be configured to execute the repetitive change monitoring process in the third embodiment. As a result, it becomes possible to strictly monitor whether or not the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the third embodiment in the processing configuration of the setting update recognition processing in the management side CPU 112 . The configuration that is different from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing processing for setting update recognition in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 .

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2101: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". Set (step S2102). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S2103). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2104). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103 or if the process of step S2104 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121, , determines whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2105). If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information exist in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of the game round is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of games played since the state was set last time is grasped, and it is further determined whether or not the grasped number of games exceeds a reference number (specifically, 100 times). However, it is not limited to this, and the number of history information storage areas 125 storing correspondence information indicating that game balls have been ejected from the game area PA is the reference number (specifically, 1000 pieces). may be determined in step S2106 as to whether or not the value is exceeded. Correspondence information indicating that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, or a predetermined combination) It may be determined in step S2106 whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 in which is stored exceeds a reference number (specifically, 1000). Further, it may be determined in step S2106 whether or not the total number of pieces of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the reference number (specifically, 1000 pieces).

In addition, when the number of game rounds executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value. However, it is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In a situation where the number is within the reference number, if the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be performed. In addition, after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, or a predetermined Combination) In a situation where the total number of discharged game balls that entered the ball is within the reference number, if the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. good. In addition, in a situation where the total number of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number, the event of the new setting being performed is notified. A configuration may be adopted in which, when the reference value is continuously exceeded, the notification corresponding to it is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In the various arithmetic processing, the processing of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output processing (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters and 41st to the 42nd parameter) are calculated.

Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the current storage target area among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S2108). A pointer information area is set in the separate storage memory 171 so that the management side CPU 112 can specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 . The information in the pointer information area is set so that when various parameters are stored in the area targeted for storage among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage target is changed to the next area. is updated to By executing the process of step S2108, various parameters at that point in time for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the separate storage memory 171. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process of step S2108 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). That is, in this embodiment, not only when the history information is read by an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory 117 history information is erased.

Thereafter, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2110). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S2110 is written in history information storage area 125 of history area 124 . Also, both the information for identifying the set value and the information of the value of the set value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed. The combination is stored as history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S2112). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored on the condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 . As a result, even if the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the separate storage memory 171 does not contain the information of the management result of the game history as the result of the actual game being played. It can be stored.

Note that the processing of step S2109 may be executed under the condition that the processing of steps S2107 and S2108 are executed. In other words, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased under the condition that a predetermined number or more of history information are stored in the history memory 117 . This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even if new settings of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time.

<Sixth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141 , a first status area 142 , a second status area 143 and a third status area 144 . 1st to 14th counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n and 144a to 144n are provided in each of these areas 141 to 144, respectively. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the areas 141 to 144, respectively. The second counters 141b to 144b of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 141c to 144c of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from LOW level to HI level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from LOW level to HI level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 14th counters 141n to 144n of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing history setting processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 .

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, so in step S2201, "11" is set in the check target counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122n corresponding to the current check target counters are the buffers to which the status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and It is determined whether or not any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, a state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is sent to the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal switches from HI level to LOW level, the information of the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114 . Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the second state information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management side RAM 111 . , and when the output state of the ninth signal switches from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114 . Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened. is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and the third state information is erased from the management-side RAM 114 when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2202, or if the process of step S2203 is executed, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is , is changed from "0" to "1", thereby determining whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level ( step S2204). If the numerical information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is the value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information of the first state is stored in management-side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. Further, when the numerical information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is the value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information of the second state is stored in management-side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. Further, when the numerical value information stored in the tenth buffer 122j is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is the value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122j, the process proceeds to step S2203. The third state information is stored in management RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, addition processing of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S2205). In the addition processing, one is added to the counter value corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth total counters 141 a to 141 n in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 . For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "11", the eleventh counter 141k for totalization is subject to addition, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth counter 141e for totalization is subject to addition. If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a is subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the corresponding counter for the first state is added (step S2207). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 142a to 142n for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh counter 142k for the first state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is If the value of the counter to be confirmed is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is to be added.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding counter for the second state is added (step S2209). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 143a to 143n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh counter 143k for the second state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is If the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state becomes the addition target.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the corresponding counter for the third state is added (step S2211). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 144a to 144n for the third state in the area 144 for the third state of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh counter 144k for the third state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state is If the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state becomes the addition target.

When a negative determination is made in step S2204, when a negative determination is made in step S2210, or when the process of step S2211 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2213). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the process after step S2202 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and the execution of opening and closing The number of occurrences of modes, the number of occurrences of high-frequency support mode, and the number of occurrences of game rounds are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as number information. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

Since the information is stored as the number of times information instead of the history information, there is no need to execute the process of deriving the number of times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

Next, the setting update recognition processing according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". Set (step S2302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S2303). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, 1 is added to the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2304). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or if the process of step S2304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121, , determines whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the total area 141 in the history memory 117 is opened and closed in the total area 141 in the history memory 117. An eighth total counter 141h for counting the number of mode occurrences and a ninth total counter 141i for counting the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode in the total area 141 in the history memory 117 It is cleared to "0" (steps S2306 to S2308). As a result, each number of times information of the number of game times executed, the number of times of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode, and the number of times of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode is cleared to "0" when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. be done. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game time, the 41st parameter indicating the number of times the high frequency support mode occurred per unit game time, and the high frequency support mode for the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurred. The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game contents after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter are changed to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. The calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current set values by making the settings correspond to the game contents after the new settings are made. It is possible to determine whether

On the other hand, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the counters other than the eighth total counter 141h, the ninth total counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 are " 0" not cleared. As a result, management of the number of game balls entered into each history target ball entry part or the frequency of entry is based on the long-term game history without being affected by new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加becomes possible.

According to the above configuration, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, the number of times the opening and closing execution mode occurs, and the high frequency support The number of times the mode has occurred and the number of times the game has occurred are stored as number information instead of being stored as history information as in the first embodiment. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

Further, since the information is stored not as the history information but as the number of times information, there is no need to execute the process of deriving the number of times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for computing various parameters.

The number of times information of the number of times of execution of game times, the number of times of occurrence of opening/closing execution mode, and the number of times of occurrence of high frequency support mode is cleared to "0" when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game time, the 41st parameter indicating the number of times the high frequency support mode occurred per unit game time, and the high frequency support mode for the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurred. The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game contents after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter are changed to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. The calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current set values by making the settings correspond to the game contents after the new settings are made. It is possible to determine whether

On the other hand, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the counters other than the eighth total counter 141h, the ninth total counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 are " 0" not cleared. As a result, management of the number of game balls entered into each history target ball entry part or the frequency of entry is based on the long-term game history without being affected by new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加becomes possible.

Note that the configuration of the history memory 117 as in this embodiment may be applied to the first to fifth embodiments and the embodiments described after this embodiment. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. Further, when applied to the third embodiment, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to "0".

In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the processing of steps S2306 to S2308 may be executed in the setting update recognition processing (FIG. 41). As a result, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, if the set value is not changed before and after that, the information on the number of execution times of the game round, the information on the number of occurrence times of the opening/closing execution mode, and the high-frequency support are provided. When the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed without clearing the information on the number of occurrences of the mode to "0", the information on the number of times the game is performed, the information on the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs, and the high-frequency support mode. can be cleared to "0".

In the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41), various parameters are calculated using the counters 141 to 144 of the history memory 117 before the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 are executed. Various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131 .

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

As the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, ie, "setting 1" to "setting 6" are provided. Specifically, a history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided in correspondence with "setting 1", a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided in correspondence with "setting 2", and a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided in correspondence with "setting 2". A history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided to correspond to "setting 3", a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided to correspond to "setting 4", and a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided to correspond to "setting 5". A history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided for setting 5, and a history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided corresponding to "setting 6".

Each of history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 is provided with a combination of history area 124 and pointer area 126 of history memory 117 in the first embodiment. Thereby, it becomes possible to store the history information corresponding to each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting values for which the new setting is performed are stored as history information. Also, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information can be stored separately for each set value without erasing the history information. In addition, since various parameters are calculated using history information corresponding to the currently set pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each setting value.

The total area 141, the first state area 142, the second state area 143, and the third state area 144 in the sixth embodiment are stored in the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, respectively. It is good also as a structure with which the combination of is set.

Next, the setting update recognition processing according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2402). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6". In addition, in the present embodiment, since the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require power supply from the outside, is provided with a setting value grasping counter, even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, Also, the value stored in the set value grasping counter is stored.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S2403). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasping counter in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2404). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, or if the process of step S2404 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121, , determines whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2405). If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process returns to step S2403.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the value of the set value grasping counter in the calculation result memory 131 are set as objects to be stored in history information and to be referenced when calculating various parameters ( step S2406). Specifically, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means that "setting 1" has been set. Set as a reference target during calculation. Also, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "2", it means that "setting 2" has been set. Set as a reference target. Also, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "3", it means that "setting 3" has been set. Set as a reference target. Also, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "4", it means that "setting 4" has been set. Set as a reference target. Also, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "5", it means that "setting 5" has been set. Set as a reference target. Also, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that "setting 6" has been set. Set as a reference target.

Thereafter, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2407). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the write process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the history information storage targets in step S2406 are selected from among the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6. FIG. Then, by referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memories 181 to 186 that are the storage objects, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing object is specified, and the pointer information that is the writing object is specified. The RTC information read in step S2407 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information that is present. Also, information for identifying the set value is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, the combination of the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed is stored as the history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S2409). In the update process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the storage target of the history information in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, and the history memories 181 to 186 are stored. Numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 are provided as history memory 117 so as to correspond to "setting 1" to "setting 6," respectively. As a result, it is possible to store the game history corresponding to each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting values for which the new setting is performed are stored as history information. Also, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information can be stored separately for each set value without erasing the history information. In addition, since various parameters are calculated using history information corresponding to the currently set pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each setting value.

The history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which the six memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided. an area corresponding to the history memory 181 for setting 2, an area corresponding to the history memory 182 for setting 2, an area corresponding to the history memory 183 for setting 3, and an area corresponding to the history memory 184 for setting 4 An area corresponding to the history memory 185 for the setting 5 and an area corresponding to the history memory 186 for the setting 6 may be set.

<Eighth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

As the history memory 117, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 are provided. Each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. In this case, in a situation where one of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is used to store the history information, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. is performed, the history information in one of the history memories 191 and 192 is left without being erased until a predetermined number or more of history information are stored in the other history memory 191 and 192 thereafter. In addition, history information can be newly stored in both history memories 191 and 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information are stored in the other history memory 191 and 192. Become.

Next, the setting update recognition processing according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to " 1” (step S2502). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S2503). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, 1 is added to the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2504). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, or if the process of step S2504 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121, , determines whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2505). If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process returns to step S2503.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag has been set as a history information storage target in the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. This is a flag for the management side CPU 112 to specify whether or not the history information is to be stored not only in the history memories 191 and 192 but also in the other history memories 191 and 192 . In addition, since the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require power supply from the outside for storing, is provided with a setting change occurrence flag, even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the setting change will occur. The value stored in the flag is stored.

Thereafter, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2507). Then, write processing to the history memories 191 and 192 is executed (step S2508). In the writing process, first, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be currently written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191, and the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to . Also, both the information for identifying the set value and the information of the value of the set value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed. The combination is stored in the first history memory 191 as history information. In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, and the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the information. Also, both the information for identifying the set value and the information of the value of the set value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and the information of the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is stored in the second history memory 192 as history information.

Thereafter, update processing for each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the updating process, first, numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. Further, in the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read out and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is not set to "1" (step S2601: NO), the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that is to be stored This means that only history information should be stored. In this case, first, the history memories 191 and 192 that are currently stored are grasped (step S2602). The calculation result memory 131 is provided with a storage target flag, and when the value of the storage target flag is "0", the first history memory 191 becomes the storage target, and the value of the storage target flag is "1". , the second history memory 192 is the object of storage. Note that since the storage target flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require power supply from the outside for storing data, even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the storage target flag remains unchanged. The value of is stored.

Thereafter, history setting execution processing is executed for the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored (step S2603). Specifically, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored. As a result, the history information is stored in one of the history memories 191 and 192, which is a storage target.

On the other hand, if the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2601: YES), the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are to be stored. This means that history information should be stored not only on one side but also on the other side. In this case, history setting execution processing is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, the first history memory 191 is subjected to steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. As a result, history information is stored in the first history memory 191 . After that, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for the second history memory 192. FIG. As a result, history information is stored in the second history memory 192 .

When the process of step S2603 or the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2605). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of ball ejection histories exist in the non-stored history memories 191 and 192 (step S2606). Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "0", the first history memory 191 is the storage target. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that a game ball has been ejected is stored. Further, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "1", the second history memory 192 is the storage target. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that the has been discharged is stored. It should be noted that it is not determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA is stored. may be determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "100") or more of history information indicating is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, storage target change processing is executed (step S2607). In the storage target change processing, the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to a value between two values different from the current value, thereby changing the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. Among them, the side to be memorized is changed. Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting the storage target flag to "1". Also, if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the storage target is changed from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191 by clearing the storage target flag to "0". As a result, the history memories 191 and 192 in which only the history information of the games executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set are set as storage targets. Various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memories 191 and 192, which are newly stored, so that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and then executed. It is possible to derive various parameters from the game.

After that, clear processing is executed for the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that has been the object of storage until then (step S2608). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the second history memory 192 is cleared to "0", and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the first history memory 191 is cleared to " 0” clear. Thereafter, the setting change occurrence flag in the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0" (step S2609).

Next, the display output processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 to be stored is grasped (step S2702). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "0", the first history memory 191 is grasped as the storage target, and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the second The history memory 192 is grasped as a storage object. Thereafter, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed using the history information stored in the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as grasped in step S2702. By this, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated, and the calculated various parameters are calculated. It is stored in the result memory 131 (step S2703). In this case, the history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 because the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1". Even if there is, the various parameters are calculated using one of the history memories 191 and 192 that are storage targets.

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or if the processing of step S2703 is executed, display processing is executed (step S2704). The processing contents of the display processing are the same as the display processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117, and when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, While the history memories 191 and 192 that have been storage targets are stored as they are, the history information is also stored in the history memories 191 and 192 that are not storage targets. When a predetermined number or more of the history information corresponding to the discharge of the game ball from the game area PA is stored in the history memories 191 and 192 on the side not to be stored, the history information is not to be stored. The history memories 191 and 192 on the side are stored as they are, and the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that have been stored until then are cleared to "0". As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters can be calculated using only the history information of the game played with the newly set setting value. Become.

On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed appropriately, the history data to be stored Memories 191 and 192 remain unchanged. Thereby, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, it is possible to appropriately derive the management result of the game history up to that point.

The history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which two memories, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, are provided. A first history area corresponding to the memory 191 and a second history area corresponding to the second history memory 192 may be set.

Also, a configuration in which only one history memory 117 is provided may be employed. In this case, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. A configuration may be employed in which the history information before the timing at which the setting is made is erased, and the history information after the timing at which the setting is made is stored and held without being erased. As a result, at the timing when a predetermined number or more of history information is accumulated after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history before the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Information can be erased. Also, by storing the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117, the setting state can be newly set in the history memory 117. It is possible to distinguish between the history information before the timing at which the is performed and the history information after the timing.

Also, the timing of erasing the history information is limited to the case where the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has reached a predetermined number or more. Instead, it may be the case that the number of times the game has been played since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was newly set exceeds the predetermined number.

In addition, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, if the setting value is not changed before and after that, the change of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored and the history information When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting value is changed before and after that, the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as described above are set so as not to be erased. may be changed and the history information may be deleted.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111, the type of the input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. It differs from the first embodiment. Also, the configuration of processing executed by the main CPU 63 to allow the management CPU 112 to specify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is inputted to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is inputted to the sixth buffer 122f. A sixth signal is input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal, A signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, a signal corresponding to the start of the game cycle is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as the eleventh signal, and a set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer. 122o, but in this embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the start of a game cycle is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as a game cycle signal, a set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, and a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the opening/closing execution mode. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the 14th buffer 122n as a high frequency support mode signal, and a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 15th buffer 122m as a door open signal. input to the buffer 122o.

A game cycle signal is input to the 11th buffer 122k, a set value update signal is input to the 12th buffer 122l, an opening/closing execution mode signal is input to the 13th buffer 122m, and a 14th buffer 122n is input. It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the high frequency support mode signal is input, the door open signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. Thus, without receiving instructions from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 can specify that the corresponding signals are input to the 11th to 16th buffers 122k to 122p. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment.

First, "10", which is the number of the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j whose signal types are to be recognized, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2801). After that, an identification start signal output process is executed (step S2802). In the output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is set to HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

After that, the output frequency information corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output frequency information is set in the output frequency counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( step S2803). The number-of-outputs counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal is output by the main CPU 63 .

In this embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 recognizes the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j, the number of prize balls set for the ball-entering section corresponding to the types of signals is determined. Outputs the type identification signal the same number of times as The management side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j are grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry portion corresponding to the types of the signals.

In step S2803, when the value of the output counter for recognition is one of "10", "9" and "8", "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning hole 31 is set in the output number counter. . Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "7", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "6", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation opening 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "5", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operation opening 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "4", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a corresponding to the out port 24a, the game ball is not paid out. is set to "0". Also, if the value of the output counter for recognition is any one of "3" to "1", the corresponding ball-entering portion does not exist and is blank, so the output count counter is set to "0".

After that, output processing of a start opportunity signal is executed (step S2804). In the output process, by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to HI level, the output of the start trigger signal is started. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

After that, on the condition that the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2805: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output counter in step S2803, The process advances to step S2806. In step S2806, output processing of a type identification signal is executed. In the output process, by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to HI level, the output of the type identification signal is started. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2807), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2808). If the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S2809). In the output process, by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to HI level, the output of the termination trigger signal is started. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2810), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2811). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtracting 1. do.

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S2811: YES), output processing of an identification end signal is executed (step S2812). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is set to HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

First, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2901). If the identification start signal has not been received, the setting update recognition process is executed in step S2902, and then the process in step S2901 is executed again. The processing contents of the setting update recognition processing are the same as those of the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 is completed (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2903). Thereafter, on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether or not a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63 . If the type identification signal has been received (step S2905: YES), 1 is added to the value of the reception counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S2906). The reception number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main side CPU 63 by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S2904.

If a negative determination is made in step S2905, or if the process of step S2906 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116, the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 is set in the reception counter. Stores the value that is specified. In this case, the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c are set with "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 31, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set with is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation opening 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operation opening 34 is set in the area 123f. Also, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence area 123g to 123l. After that, 1 is added to the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S2909).

When a negative determination is made in step S2904, or when the process of step S2909 is executed, it is determined whether reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2910). If the reception of the identification end signal has not ended (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the processes after step S2905 are executed. Execute. If the identification end signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2910: YES), the history setting process in step S2911, the display output process in step S2912, and the external output process in step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 51 is a time chart showing how information on correspondence between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 51(a) shows the period during which the output state of the first signal is HI level, FIG. 51(b) shows the period during which the output state of the second signal is HI level, and FIG. ) shows the period during which the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 51(d) shows the period during which the output state of the open/close execution mode signal is at HI level, and FIG. FIG. 51(f) shows the period during which the output state of the high-frequency support mode signal is at HI level, and FIG. FIG. 51(g) shows the timing for adding 1 to the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114, and FIG. The timing at which the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S2908) is shown.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. , the open/close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, output of an identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is started. After that, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from HI level to LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the management processing (FIG. 50), thereby entering the identification state as shown in FIG. 51(f).

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(a) from timing t3 to timing t4. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(b) from timing t5 to timing t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at the timing of t6, 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 as shown in FIG. 51(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(c) from timing t8 to timing t10. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at the timing of t9, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "1" is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. ” information.

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(a) from timing t11 to timing t12. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . Then, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the second timing is shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at each of timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23, as shown in FIG. 51(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(c) from timing t25 to timing t27. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at timing t26, as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "10" is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. ” information.

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 51(c), 51(d), and 51(e), the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are LOW. level to HI level. As a result, output of an identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2910 of the management process (FIG. 50), thereby canceling the identification state as shown in FIG. 51(f).

In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize balls corresponding to the entering ball section that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are a plurality of types of ball-entering parts with the same number of winning balls, the history information cannot distinguish between the ball-entering parts. Specifically, since the number of winning balls is one for each of the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34, it is possible to distinguish between the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls may be different between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 . As a result, even with a configuration in which history information is stored as in the present embodiment, it is possible to distinguish between the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the set value update signal and the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether or not the game cycle has started, information corresponding to whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, Information corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is on and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open is also sent from the main side CPU 63 to indicate that the signal path corresponds to these pieces of information. can be identified by the management side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence information. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is the information that requires the main side CPU 63 to recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a to 118j to the management side CPU 112. Become. When the management side CPU 112 recognizes the correspondence information, pulse signals of the same number as the number of prize balls corresponding to the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the second signal. output to This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Tenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the configuration for providing the management IC 66 with information on each ball entry result. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the signal path for inputting the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main side CPU 63 and the management IC 66. As shown in FIG.

The detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Also, the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operation opening detection sensor 47a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch path SL21 is formed by branching from the middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed by branching from the middle position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed by branching from the middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed by branching from the middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed by branching from the middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed by branching from the middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed by branching from the middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main side CPU 63. FIG. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes processing for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Since there is no need to do this, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

Further, the branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist within the MPU62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branching point and the branching routes SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inputting an abnormal ball entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<Eleventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the display device for displaying the management results of the game history. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of main controller 60 in this embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the first notification display device 69a, the second notification display device 69b, and the third notification display device 69c. A display device 201, a second notification display device 202, a third notification display device 203, and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided. These first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side on the device mounting surface of the main control board 61 .

Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is installed so that its display surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a covered. In this case, since the board box 60a is transparent, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 accommodated in the board box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the board box 60a. becomes possible. In addition, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth information display devices 201 are displayed through the opposing wall portion 60b. 204 can be visually observed.

On the display surface of the first notification display device 201, alphabets such as "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" are displayed. On the other hand, in the second notification display device 202, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, numbers in the range of "0" to "9" are displayed. The management result of the game history is notified using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. In this case, in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the game history management results (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters in the first embodiment, parameter, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameters) are displayed corresponding to the type, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are subject to notification. A display corresponding to the content of the management result of the game history of the type shown is performed.

Specifically, the types of game history management results are the 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameters, and the 41st to 42nd parameters in the first embodiment. exists. On the first notification display device 201, a display corresponding to the type of parameter group to be notified is performed. Specifically, when any one of the first to eighth parameters is to be notified, "A" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and any one of the eleventh to eighteenth parameters is displayed. When it is subject to notification, "E" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and when any of the 21st to 26th parameters is subject to notification, the first notification display device "H" is displayed at 201, and when any of the 31st parameters is to be notified, "L" is displayed at the first notification display device 201, and the 41st to 42nd parameters are notified. If it is a target, "O" is displayed on the display device 201 for first notification.

The second notification display device 202 displays the order corresponding to the type of the game history management result to be notified among the arrangement order of the game history management results in the parameter group to be notified. Taking the parameter group of the first to eighth parameters as an example, when the first parameter is to be notified, "1" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the second parameter is displayed. When the notification target is set, "2" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the third parameter is the notification target, "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 202. is displayed, and when the fourth parameter is to be notified, "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the fifth parameter is to be notified, the second notification When "5" is displayed on the display device 202 and the sixth parameter is to be notified, "6" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the seventh parameter is to be notified. If there is, "7" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and "8" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 if the eighth parameter is to be notified. Further, taking the parameter group of the 21st to 26th parameters as an example, when the 21st parameter is to be notified, "1" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the 22nd parameter is displayed. When the parameter is to be notified, "2" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the 23rd parameter is to be notified, the second notification display device 202 displays " 3" is displayed, and when the 24th parameter is to be notified, "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the 25th parameter is to be notified, the second "5" is displayed on the notification display device 202, and "6" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the 26th parameter is to be notified.

Details of the display contents of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are as follows. It is displayed on the display device 203, and the number corresponding to the one's place is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. FIG.

In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters and the forty-first to forty-second The display corresponding to the calculation result of the parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, is displayed, the first parameter, which is the first display target, is displayed. is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is two seconds. On the other hand, the management CPU 112 has a calculation period of 51 seconds for the various parameters, and the number of the various parameters is 25. Therefore, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are to be notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 202 at least once.

In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the first embodiment, not only the management result of the game history is notified, but also the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In , the value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed. Specifically, in the changeable state, the first to third information display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, while the first to fourth information display devices 204 arranged side by side are present at the right end. A value corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 which is currently running. That is, when "setting 1" is selected in the changeable state, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when "setting 2" is selected in the changeable state, "2" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when "setting 3" is selected in the changeable state, "3" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, indicating that the change is possible. When "Setting 4" is selected in the state, "4" is displayed on the display device 204 for fourth notification, and when "Setting 5" is selected in the changeable state, "4" is displayed. "5" is displayed on the display device 204, and "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 when "setting 6" is selected in the changeable state.

Next, an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the control of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the control of the MPU 62. As shown in FIG.

As already explained, the main control board 61 is provided with the MPU 62 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . Also, the main control board 61 is provided with a first display IC 205 , a second display IC 206 , a third display IC 207 and a fourth display IC 208 .

The first display IC 205 is provided corresponding to the first notification display device 201, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 via a signal path SL31 and electrically connected to the first notification display device 201 via a signal path SL32. It is connected. The first display IC 205 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and display control of the first notification display device 201 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. control segment lighting. The first display IC 205 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operating power is supplied. 201 to continue to display. Then, by changing the display data by the MPU 62, the display of the first notification display device 201 is changed to display contents corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in a situation where the display data is not set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the first display IC 205 is started, the display data becomes all "0" data. , the first notification display device 201 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, it is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the first display IC 205, the first display IC 205 displays Data may be stored and retained. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the first notification display device 201 immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped It will be started by the display device 201 for the 1st information.

The second display IC 206 is provided corresponding to the second notification display device 202, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL33 and electrically connected to the second notification display device 202 through the signal path SL34. It is connected. The second display IC 206 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the second notification display device 202 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display control segment lighting. The second display IC 206 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operating power is supplied. 202 to continue to display. Then, by changing the display data by the MPU 62, the display of the second notification display device 202 is changed to display contents corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in a situation where the display data is not set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the second display IC 206 is started, the display data is all "0" data. , the second notification display device 202 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, it is not limited to this configuration, and is displayed on the second display IC 206 even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the second display IC 206. Data may be stored and retained. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the second notification display device 202 immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped It will be started by the second notification display device 202 .

The third display IC 207 is provided corresponding to the third notification display device 203, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL35 and electrically connected to the third notification display device 203 through the signal path SL36. It is connected. The third display IC 207 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62. Display control of the third notification display device 203 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display control segment lighting. The third display IC 207 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operating power is supplied. 203 continues to be displayed. Then, by changing the display data by the MPU 62, the display of the third notification display device 203 is changed to display contents corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, after the supply of operating power to the third display IC 207 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data is all "0" data. , the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, it is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the third display IC 207, the third display IC 207 displays Data may be stored and retained. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the third notification display device 203 immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped It will be started by the third notification display device 203 .

A fourth display IC 208 is provided corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 via a signal path SL37 and electrically connected to the fourth notification display device 204 via a signal path SL38. It is connected. The fourth display IC 208 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, the display control of the fourth notification display device 204, that is, each display control segment lighting. The fourth display IC 208 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored display data to the fourth notification display device. 204 to continue to display. Then, by changing the display data by the MPU 62, the display of the fourth notification display device 204 is changed to display contents corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, after the supply of operating power to the fourth display IC 208 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data is all "0" data. , the fourth notification display device 204 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, it is not limited to this configuration, and is displayed on the fourth display IC 208 even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the fourth display IC 208. Data may be stored and retained. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the fourth notification display device 204 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped It will be started by the fourth notification display device 204 .

The output of display data to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 is performed by the MPU 62, but the output setting of the display data is performed by the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112, respectively. That is, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the management CPU 112 executes display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. In this case, the period during which the display data output setting is performed is adjusted in each of the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 so that the display data output setting is not performed at the same time. Specifically, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, the display data output setting is performed by the main side CPU 63. The display data output setting by the management side CPU 112 is not performed. On the other hand, in a state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the display data output setting is performed by the management side CPU 112, whereas the display data output setting is not performed by the main side CPU 63. FIG.

If the display data output setting by the main side CPU 63 and the display data output setting by the management side CPU 112 are performed at the same time, the display data output setting by the main side CPU 63 is given priority. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the display data output setting by the management side CPU 112 is given priority.

Next, the display processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3001). The update timing counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the timing for updating the display contents of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . After that, by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0", it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. is determined (step S3002).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, 1 is added to the value of the display object counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S3003). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "24" (step S3004: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S3005). The display target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the types of parameters to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . The 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameters, the 41st to 42nd parameters, and the display target counters of "0" to "24" There is a one-to-one correspondence with the possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter to be displayed first becomes the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the value of the display target counter is "24". , the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, is the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

When a negative determination is made in step S3004, or when the process of step S3005 is executed, the display data corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the management ROM 113 (step S3006). Then, display data setting processing corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is executed (step S3007), and display data setting processing corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is executed (step S3008). For example, if the value of the display target counter is "0" and the first parameter is the display target, the display data for displaying "A" on the first notification display device 201 is sent to the first display IC 205. In addition to outputting, display data for displaying "1" on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206 . Further, for example, if the value of the display target counter is "24" and the 42nd parameter is to be displayed, the display data for displaying "O" on the first notification display device 201 is set to the first display. While outputting to IC205, the display data for displaying "2" on the 2nd information display device 202 are output to 2nd display IC206.

After that, the parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result memory 131, and the display data corresponding to the 10's place and the display data corresponding to the 1's place of the result of multiplying the read parameter by 100 are displayed. Read from the management side ROM 113 (step S3009). Then, display control is performed on the third notification display device 203 so that the number corresponding to the tens digit of the result is displayed (step S3010), and the fourth notification display device 203 is controlled so that the number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed. Display control of the notification display device 204 is performed (step S3011). For example, when the result of multiplying by 100 is "53", the display data for displaying "5" on the third notification display device 203 is output to the third display IC 207, and to the fourth notification display device 204. Display data for displaying “3” is output to the fourth display IC 208 .

Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management RAM 114 as the value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3012).

By executing the display processing as described above, the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. The display of the management result of the game history is performed regardless of whether the game is continued or not. This is done regardless of whether it is visible or not. By executing the display control of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 regardless of the game situation and the state of the pachinko machine 10 in this way, the first to fourth information display devices 201 204 can be simplified.

The display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started after the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63. be done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, just like the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

The first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 store and hold the display data output from the MPU 62 while the operating power is being supplied, and correspond to the corresponding first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification according to the display data. to control the display. Therefore, after the display of the management result of the game history is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 do not go into the off state (that is, the non-display state), and the lighting state corresponding to some display ( display state).

Next, setting value update processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are extinguished (step S3101). Specifically, it outputs display data of all “0” to the first to third display ICs 205 to 207 . As a result, the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are all turned off, and the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off. Incidentally, immediately after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display segments of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are all extinguished, and the first to fourth information display devices 201 204 is in a non-display state. Therefore, step S3101 is a process for maintaining the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 in the non-display state, and if any of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 If it is in the display state, it is processed to be in the non-display state.

After that, "1" is set in the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3102). The setting value counter is a counter for specifying which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is by the main side CPU 63 . By setting "1" to the set value counter, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point when the set value update process is executed.

After that, display start processing of the setting value in the fourth display notification device 204 is executed (step S3103). In the setting value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208 . As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 .

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned off (step S3104: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process returns to step S3104 to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105: YES), 1 is added to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3106). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3107: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S3108). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting value is changed to "setting 1". going back.

When a negative determination is made in step S3107, or when the process of step S3108 is executed, the display update process of the setting value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3109). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main side RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208 . As a result, the number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 . By confirming the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the update button 68b is pressed.

After executing the process of step S3109, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3104: NO), the processing after step S3105 is executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3104: YES), the management result display start processing is executed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S3110).

In the display start process, a management result display start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 . The management CPU 112 that has received the management result display start command executes processing for displaying the first parameter among the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 . The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). As a result, the display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operation power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

Next, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the game history management result is displayed and when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated will be described. FIG. 57(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the game history management result is displayed, and FIG. 57(b) is a pachinko machine. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting state of No. 10 is changed; FIG.

When the management result of the game history is displayed, at least one display segment in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is turned on as shown in FIG. 57(a). In other words, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enters the display state. This is the same regardless of which of the 1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st to 42nd parameters is to be notified. . As a result, the manager of the game hall can see that all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It is possible to grasp that the management result of the game history is being displayed.

On the other hand, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, all the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off as shown in FIG. 57(b). That is, each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is put into a non-display state. Further, any one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. FIG. In this way, one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in a non-display state, The manager of the game hall can grasp that the display corresponding to the setting value is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and can clearly grasp the current setting value. becomes possible.

Next, referring to the time charts of FIGS. 58(a) to 58(h), how the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are brought into the display state will be described. FIG. 58(a) shows a changeable state period in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, and FIG. 58(b) shows updating of the setting display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 58(c) shows the period during which the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 58(d) shows the first to fourth information display devices. FIG. 58(e) shows the period during which the first notification display device 201 is in the display state, and FIG. 58(g) shows the period during which the display device 203 for the third notification is in the display state, and FIG. 58(h) shows the period during which the display device 203 for the third notification is in the display state It shows the period during which the display device 204 for the display is in the display state.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. becomes a modifiable state in which At the timing t1, the setting display is updated as shown in FIG. 58(b), and the fourth notification display device 204 enters the display state as shown in FIG. 58(h), and the display state is continued. In this case, since "Setting 1" is selected, "1" is displayed on the display device 204 for fourth notification. On the other hand, at timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, that is, all display segments are turned off. maintained.

After that, by operating the update button 68b to change the setting value at each of timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, and timing t5, as shown in FIG. is the timing for updating the setting value display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(h), the display content of the fourth notification display device 204 is switched to the number corresponding to the setting value after the change at each of these timings. The display device 204 for the fourth notification is maintained in the display state including each timing at which is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are also in the non-display state at each of these set value display update timings. The segment remains extinguished.

After that, the changeable state is terminated as shown in FIG. In this case, the display period of the game history management result is started at the timing t6 as shown in FIG. 58(c). Specifically, the display of the first parameter stored in the calculation result memory 131 is started. Therefore, at the timing t6, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are switched from the non-display state to the display state, and the fourth notification display The device 204 remains in the displayed state although the displayed content is changed.

After that, timing t7, timing t8, timing t9, timing t10, timing t11 and timing t12 are timings for updating the display of the management result of the game history as shown in FIG. 58(d). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(h), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 change the display contents corresponding to the management result of the game history after updating at each timing. However, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the display state, including each timing at which the display contents are switched.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the configuration in which the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the corresponding display is displayed. This is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be used not only for displaying the management result of the game history, but also as a display device for performing display corresponding to the changeable state. .

Corresponds to the period in which the game history management result is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the state in which the setting values can be changed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period during which the display is made. As a result, by grasping the status of display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to determine which display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to identify whether there is

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged so that when the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the display mode is different from the display mode when the management result of the game history is displayed. Display controlled. Thus, by grasping the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify which display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. becomes possible.

A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. As a result, it is possible to perform a wide variety of displays as displays corresponding to the management results of the game history. In addition, due to the presence of a plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204, the display mode can be enlarged depending on whether the management result of the game history is displayed or the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed. It is possible to make a difference.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 which are not in the non-display state when displaying the management result of the game history are in the non-display state. As a result, only by confirming whether or not the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, it is possible to display the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value. It is possible to clearly identify which one of them is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the fourth notification display device 204 is brought into the display state, and the display content is the same as that of the fourth notification display device 204 when displaying the management result of the game history. This is the display content that can be displayed in . By making it possible for the display contents of the fourth notification display device 204 to be overlapped in this way, it is possible to display the management result of the game history and display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value. It becomes possible not to restrict the display contents of . In addition, even if the display contents of the fourth notification display device 204 may overlap in this way, when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, the first to third notification display devices Since 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

When the game history management result is displayed, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. Thus, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are clearly different between when the game history management result is displayed and when the setting value changeable state is displayed. becomes possible.

When the management result of the game history is displayed, even if the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is changed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the non-display state. . This makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history regardless of the timing of checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed. In addition, regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed, the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 can display the game history management results and change the setting values. It becomes possible to specify which of the corresponding displays is being performed.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, only one of the fourth notification display devices 204 is in the display state. This makes it easier to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is being performed.

In the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged in the horizontal direction, only the fourth notification display device 204 arranged at the right end is used to display the state in which the setting value can be changed. done. This makes it easier to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is being performed.

When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display corresponding to the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is performed using the first display device 201 and the second display device 202 for notification. A display corresponding to the content of the management result of the game history is performed using the third display device 203 and the fourth display device 204 for notification. This makes it easier to grasp the management result of the game history. In this case, both the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, which display the types of game history management results, are in a non-display state when the setting value can be changed. As a result, the state in which the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 for displaying the type are not displayed corresponds to the setting value changeable state. It becomes easy to grasp that display is being performed.

Further, when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, not only the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 that display the type of management result of the game history, but also the game The third notification display device 203, which displays the content of the history management results, is also in a non-display state. This makes it easier to understand that the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is being performed.

Display data is output from the MPU 62 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, and the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 perform predetermined displays on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. In this configuration, display data are stored and held in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. FIG. As a result, for example, even if the main CPU 63 stops the execution of the process for advancing the game due to the occurrence of radio wave detection abnormality or vibration detection abnormality (if affirmative determination is made in step S306), It is possible to maintain the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

In addition, among the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the targets that are in the non-display state (all extinguished state) in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed are the first to It is not limited to the third notification display devices 201 to 203, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 may be used. In this case, the third notification display device 203 displays a predetermined display (for example, "5") different from the content of the current set value, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays the current set value. may be configured to display a number corresponding to , and a predetermined display (for example, display of "5") different from the content of the current set value is performed on the fourth notification display device 204, and a third notification The display device 203 may display a number corresponding to the current set value. Also, the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all off state), and the second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a display state. Alternatively, the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a non-display state (all off state), and the second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in a display state. The second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all off state), and the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. state, the second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a non-display state (all off state), and the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 may be in a display state.

In addition, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be configured to be in a non-display state (all extinguished state). Only the display device 202 may be in a non-display state (all off state), only the third notification display device 203 may be in a non-display state (all off state), or a fourth notification display device A configuration in which only 204 is in a non-display state (all off state) may be adopted.

In addition, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be configured to be in the display state, and only the second notification display device 202 may be displayed. The configuration may be such that only the third notification display device 203 is in the display state.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the setting value changeable state are different from those in the eleventh embodiment. The configuration that is different from the eleventh embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

59(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first notification display device 201, and FIG. 59(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the second notification display device 202. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), the first notification display device 201 has seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g is shaped like a bar and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are arranged so that the first notification display device 201 serves as a so-called seven segment display.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), the second notification display device 202 has seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is shaped like a bar and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g are arranged so that the second notification display device 202 becomes a so-called seven segment display.

FIG. 60 shows the case of displaying the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the case of displaying that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changeable. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in FIG.

The display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 when displaying the management result of the game history are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment. Therefore, any one of "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and "1" to "8" are displayed on the second notification display device 202. ” is displayed.

In this case, each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g of the first notification display device 201 corresponds to "A", "E", "H", "L" in the first notification display device 201, At least one type of display of "O" is a light emission target. In other words, even if any of "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the display segments 201a to 201g that are not subject to light emission are does not exist.

Similarly for the second notification display device 202, each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g of the second notification display device 202 corresponds to "1" to "8" in the second notification display device 202. light emission target in at least one type of display among the displays. In other words, even if any one of "1" to "8" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, there are no display segments 202a to 202g that are not subject to light emission.

In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, in the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state. As described above, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e can be in a luminous state when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first notification display device 201. FIG. Furthermore, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a luminous state in any case where the management result of the game history is displayed on the first notification display device 201. FIG. On the other hand, among the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g, only the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state. Not present when displaying results. As a result, while the display segments 201b and 201e that can be in a light-emitting state when displaying the management result of the game history are used in the changeable state of the set value, the display is not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed. The mode can be displayed on the first notification display device 201 . Therefore, while the display segments 201a to 201g used for displaying the management result of the game history are also used, the first notification display device 201 can be caused to display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value. It becomes possible.

In the setting value changeable state, in the second notification display device 202, the third display segment 202c is in a light emitting state. As already explained, the third display segment 202c can be in a luminous state when the management result of the game history is displayed on the second notification display device 202. FIG. On the other hand, the display content of the second notification display device 202, in which only the third display segment 202c of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is in the light emitting state, exists when the game history management result is displayed. not. As a result, in the setting value changeable state, while using the display segment 202c that can be in a light emitting state when displaying the management result of the game history, a display mode that is not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed can be used. It is possible to display on the second notification display device 202 . Therefore, while the display segments 202a to 202g used for displaying the management result of the game history are also used, the second notification display device 202 can be caused to display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value. It becomes possible.

Next, setting value update processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a process for starting display of set values in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3201). Specifically, with respect to the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light-emitting state, and the other display segments 201a, 201c, 201d, 201f, and 201g are in a light-off state. display data is output to the first display IC 205 . Further, for the second notification display device 202, display data is output to the second display IC 206 so that the third display segment 202c is in a light emitting state and the other display segments 202a, 202b, 202d to 202g are in a non-lighting state. As a result, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 start displaying to notify that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changeable.

After that, a process for turning off the third notification display device 203 is executed (step S3202). Specifically, display data that is all “0” is output to the third display IC 207 . As a result, all the display segments of the third notification display device 203 are turned off, and the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state.

After that, "1" is set in the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3203). The setting value counter is a counter for specifying which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is by the main side CPU 63 . By setting "1" to the set value counter, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point when the set value update process is executed.

After that, display start processing of the setting value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3204). In the setting value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208 . As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 .

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned off (step S3205: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process returns to step S3205 to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206: YES), 1 is added to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3207). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3208: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S3209). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to the value one step higher. going back.

When a negative determination is made in step S3208, or when the process of step S3209 is executed, the display update process of the setting value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3210). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main side RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208 . As a result, the number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 . By confirming the fourth notification display device 204, the administrator of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S3210, the process returns to step S3205 to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3205: NO), the processing after step S3206 is executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3205: YES), the management result display start processing is executed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S3211).

In the display start process, a management result display start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 . The management CPU 112 that has received the management result display start command executes processing for displaying the first parameter among the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 . The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). As a result, the display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operation power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The setting value can be changed by making the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, which can be in the light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed, be in the light emitting state. An indication corresponding to the state is made. As a result, in order to diversify the display of the management result of the game history, it is possible to limit the contents of the display corresponding to the management result of the game history as little as possible. On the other hand, for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202b are in a light emitting state when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed. The combination of 202g is a combination that does not exist when the game history management result is displayed. Thus, by grasping the combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in the light emitting state for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the game history management result can be displayed. It is possible to grasp which one of the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value and the changeable state of the set value is being performed.

For each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, there are display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that do not emit light even if the display of the management result of the game history is performed in all patterns. not. As a result, it is possible to limit the display contents of the management result of the game history as little as possible in order to diversify the display corresponding to the management result of the game history.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the third notification display device 203, which is not in the non-display state when displaying the management result of the game history, is in the non-display state. As a result, not only the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, but also whether or not the third notification display device 203 is in the non-display state can be confirmed, whereby the game history can be displayed. It is possible to clearly specify which of the display of the management result and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification.

In addition, it is limited to the configuration in which only one type of display content corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is set. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a plurality of types are set. In this case, the display order of the plurality of types of display contents is predetermined, and each time the changeable state is newly executed, the display contents to be displayed may be changed according to the display order. In this way, even if there are a plurality of types of display contents corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value, these display contents are displayed in the display segment 201a which is in a light-emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed. .

In one of the case of displaying the management result of the game history and the case of displaying corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the first and second notification display devices A configuration may be adopted in which blinking display is performed in 201 and 202, and display in which lighting is maintained is performed in the other. In this case, the manager of the gaming hall can specify which of the display corresponding to the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state depending on whether the display is blinking or lighting. A combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g which are in a light emitting state in the display corresponding to the possible state may be a combination used when displaying the management result of the game history. It may be a combination that is not used when displaying the result. Further, the lighting period and the extinguishing period in the blinking display may be configured to match each other between the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, or may be completely shifted. , may be partially overlapped.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, when an abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the corresponding display is performed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, unlike the eleventh embodiment. there is The configuration that is different from the eleventh embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the abnormality display area 211 provided in the main RAM 65. As shown in FIG.

The abnormality display area 211 is an area for storing information on abnormal conditions to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . The abnormality display area 211 is provided with a plurality of unit areas 211a to 211d. Specifically, a first unit area 211a, a second unit area 211b, a third unit area 211c, and a fourth unit area 211d are provided. Each of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d can store information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10, one by one. That is, in the abnormality display area 211, a maximum of four pieces of information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored.

Here, in this embodiment, all the information of the abnormal state that occurs in the pachinko machine 10 is specified by the main CPU 63 . For example, when an abnormality related to the payout of game balls occurs (for example, the bottom tray 56a is full, the tank 75 is empty, and the payout device 76 has an abnormality in payout), a command corresponding to the occurred abnormality is sent to the payout side CPU 92. to the main side CPU 63. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a radio wave detection sensor and a vibration detection sensor (not shown), and when the radio wave detection sensor detects an illegal radio wave, an abnormal signal corresponding to it is transmitted to the main side CPU 63, and an abnormal signal is generated. When the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, an abnormal signal corresponding to it is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 . Also, based on identifying that normal signal transmission is not performed from each of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, occurrence of disconnection abnormality of these entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a is specified.

The types of abnormal conditions specified by the main CPU 63 are larger than the maximum number of abnormal condition information that can be stored in the abnormal display area 211 . Then, when many abnormal conditions occur simultaneously, it is assumed that new abnormal information will be generated even though the maximum number of abnormal condition information has already been stored in the abnormal display area 211 . On the other hand, the storage priority is set for the abnormal state information at the setting stage of the pachinko machine 10, and in the situation where the maximum number of abnormal state information has already been stored in the abnormality display area 211, If an abnormal state occurs in the above state, the information of the abnormal state with a higher storage priority is left in the abnormality display area 211 . As a result, it becomes possible to preferentially execute notification of an abnormal state having a high storage priority.

Next, the abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The abnormality setting process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, it is determined whether or not an abnormal display target has occurred (step S3301). Types of abnormal display targets include full tank 56a, no balls in tank 75, abnormal dispensing by dispensing device 76, abnormal radio wave detection, abnormal vibration detection, and disconnection abnormality of each incoming ball detection sensor 42a-49a. The number of types of abnormal display targets is greater than the number of first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormal display area 211. FIG.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, whether or not the information of the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that occurred this time is already stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. is determined (step S3302). If it has already been stored, the information of the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display object that occurred this time is not stored in the abnormal display area 211 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the same type of abnormal state information from being redundantly stored in the abnormal display area 211 .

If a negative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is the maximum value (specifically, "4") (step S3303). The abnormality target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of areas in which abnormal state information is stored among the first to fourth unit areas 211 a to 211 d in the abnormality display area 211 .

If the value of the abnormality target counter is the maximum value (step S3303: YES), priority comparison processing is executed (step S3304). In the priority comparison process, first, among the abnormal state information stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information with the lowest storage priority is specified. The storage priority is determined in advance at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and specifically, the lower tray 56a is full → no balls in the tank 75 → abnormal vibration detection → abnormal payout by payout device 76 → ball detection sensor 42a. The storage priority increases in the order of wire breakage to 49a → radio wave detection abnormality. In the priority comparison process, which of the abnormal state information with the lowest storage priority stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d and the abnormality display target that has occurred this time has a higher storage priority. Compare and judge whether.

If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is lower (step S3305: NO), the abnormality information corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormality display area 211 . As a result, in a configuration in which the number of types of abnormality display targets is greater than the number of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211, the information on the abnormality state with a high storage priority is displayed. It becomes possible to leave it in the abnormality display area 211 .

If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that occurred this time is higher (step S3305: YES), the abnormality display area 211 is set (step S3306). In the abnormality display area 211 setting process that is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, in the unit areas 211a to 211d specified as storing the information on the abnormal state with the lowest storage priority, Overwrite the abnormal status information corresponding to the abnormal display target.

On the other hand, if the value of the abnormality counter of the main RAM 65 has not reached the maximum value (step S3303: NO), after adding 1 to the value of the abnormality counter (step S3307), the abnormality display area 211 is set. is executed (step S3306). In the setting process, one area is selected from among the unit areas 211a to 211d in which information on the abnormal state is not stored in the abnormal display area 211, and the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target that occurred this time is displayed in the selected area. store the information of

It should be noted that in step S3306, if there is only one piece of abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a. If there are a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of "n".

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not a cancellation event for an abnormality display target has occurred (step S3308). For example, whether or not a command has been received from the payout side CPU 92 indicating that the full tank of the lower tray 56a has been canceled, that the tank 75 has no balls, or that the payout abnormality of the payout device 76 has been canceled. judge. In addition, whether or not an abnormality cancellation operation has been performed for the occurrence of radio wave detection abnormality, whether or not an abnormality cancellation operation has been performed for the occurrence of vibration detection abnormality, or whether or not an abnormality cancellation operation has been performed for the occurrence of disconnection abnormality. judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3308, the process of erasing the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3309). In the erasing process, it is determined whether or not the abnormal state information corresponding to the abnormal display target to be canceled this time is stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. , and when it is stored, the information of the abnormal state is erased by clearing "0" to the area in which it is stored. In this case, if only one piece of abnormal state information is stored in the abnormal display area 211 after erasing, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a. When a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information are stored in the display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b in descending order of the value of "n". Also, 1 is subtracted from the value of the abnormality object counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3310).

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an abnormality display start operation has occurred (step S3311). An error display start operation is performed by pressing the update button 68b while the game machine body 12 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable. It is done by manipulating

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, it is determined whether information on one or more abnormal states is stored in the abnormality display area 211 (step S3312). If the information of the abnormal state is not stored, the abnormal display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the abnormal display from being started even though there is no abnormal state information to be notified.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, the abnormal display flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3313). The abnormal display flag stops the display corresponding to the management result of the game history, and displays the display corresponding to the abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that it is a situation that should be performed in . Even if the abnormal display start operation is performed in a situation where the abnormal display flag is already set to "1", a negative determination is made in step S3311.

After that, a management result display cancellation setting process is executed (step S3314). In the stop setting process, a stop display command is sent to the management side CPU 112 to temporarily stop updating the display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . Upon receiving the display stop command, the management CPU 112 stops execution of the display processing (FIG. 55). However, even if the management side CPU 112 receives the display stop command, it does not set display data that is all "0" data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 . Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the display of the management result of the game history at that time is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. be.

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an operation to end the abnormality display has occurred (step S3315). The abnormal display termination operation is performed by pressing the reset button 68c while the gaming machine body 12 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable. It is done by manipulating If an affirmative determination is made in step S3315, the abnormal display flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3316). It should be noted that even if an operation to end the abnormal display is performed in a situation where the value of the abnormal display flag is already "0", a negative determination is made in step S3315.

After that, the management result display cancellation processing is executed (step S3317). In the cancellation cancellation process, by transmitting a cancellation cancellation command to the management side CPU 112, the state in which updating of the display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is cancelled. unlock. The management-side CPU 112 resumes the execution of the display processing (FIG. 55) by receiving the cancellation cancellation command. However, even if the management side CPU 112 receives the cancellation cancellation command, it does not set the display data to be all "0" data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 . Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the management side CPU 112 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the abnormal display at that time is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. In addition, the management side CPU 112 continues to store the history information and to calculate various parameters even in a situation where updating of the display of the management result of the game history is stopped. It is stored in the result memory 131 . Therefore, when the state in which the updating of the display of the management result of the game history is canceled is canceled, the display of the latest management result of the game history is immediately displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It will be resumed.

In the abnormality setting process, when "1" is set in the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3318: YES), the abnormality display process is executed (step S3319). FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing processing for displaying an abnormality.

First, extinguishing processing of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3401). Specifically, the display data of all “0” is output to the first and second display ICs 205 and 206 . As a result, all of the display segments of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are put into a non-display state.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3402). The update timing counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the timing for updating the display contents of the abnormality display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . If the value of the update timing counter is already "0", that state is maintained. After that, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter is "0" ( step S3403).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, update processing of the display target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S3404). In the update process, if this is the first error display process after the error display flag of the main RAM 65 was set to "1", the display object counter is set to "0". The value of the display target counter corresponds to the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. Specifically, the value of "0" of the display target counter corresponds to the first unit area 211a. A value of "1" for the display target counter corresponds to the second unit area 211b, a value of "2" for the display target counter corresponds to the third unit area 211c, and a value of "3" for the display target counter corresponds to the second unit area 211b. ” corresponds to the fourth unit area 211d. In the updating process, if this time is not the first abnormal display process after the abnormal display flag of the main RAM 65 was set to "1", 1 is added to the value of the display object counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not abnormal state information is stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be displayed among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d (step S3405). Here, as already explained, when only one piece of abnormal state information is stored, that abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information are stored. In this case, abnormal state information is stored in order from the n-th unit area 211a to 211b with the smallest value of "n". Therefore, if no abnormal state information is stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter, abnormal state information is also stored in the area corresponding to the value greater than the display target counter value. There will be no. Also, if the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "3", the corresponding area does not exist in the first place, so it is treated as if the abnormal state information is not stored. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the value of the display target counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3406). Here, it is assumed that all the abnormal states that are the targets of the abnormal display are canceled in the situation where the abnormal display is being performed. In this case, even if the abnormality display process is executed, the abnormality display area 211 does not store information on the abnormality. In such a situation, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 display that no abnormal state information is stored.

When a negative determination is made in step S3405, or when the process of step S3406 is executed, the display data to be displayed corresponding to the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 is read out from the main ROM 64 (step S3407). Specifically, among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211, the information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main RAM 65 is read. Then, display data corresponding to the information is read from the main ROM 64 . The display data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information on the abnormal state, and the display contents of the third and fourth display devices 203 and 204 based on the display data are different for each type of information on the abnormal state. are different. There is also display data corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information, and this display data is different from the display data corresponding to the abnormal state information. Therefore, when there is no abnormal state information, the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are different from those when there is abnormal state information.

On the other hand, the display contents of the display corresponding to the information of the abnormal state and the display contents of the display corresponding to the absence of the information of the abnormal state in the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 The contents of display when the game history management results are displayed on the display devices 203 and 204 for notification 4 and the contents of the setting values displayed on the display device 204 for notification overlap. On the other hand, when the game history management result is displayed, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In the state, the first to third information display devices 201 to 203 are in a non-display state and the fourth information display device 204 is in a display state, and when an abnormality is displayed, the first and second information display devices 201 and 202 are in a non-display state and the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in a display state. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to grasp whether it is a display or not.

Thereafter, display control is performed on the third notification display device 203 according to the display data read out in step S3407 (step S3408), and display control is performed on the fourth notification display device 204 (step S3409). In this case, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 203 are displayed in both cases of display corresponding to abnormal state information and display corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information. None of the display devices 204 are in a non-display state (that is, they are not in an all-lights-out state), and are in some display state.

Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as a value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3410).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a configuration in which game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, displays corresponding to abnormal states of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. is done. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be used not only for displaying the management results of the game history, but also as display devices for displaying information corresponding to an abnormal state.

When the pachinko machine 10 does not have an abnormal state and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is caused to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 An indication is provided corresponding to the fact that no abnormal condition has occurred. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 by checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

A period during which the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and a display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. is distinguished from the period for which As a result, by grasping the status of display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to determine which display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to identify whether there is

When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the management result of the game history is displayed. Display controlled. Thus, by grasping the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify which display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. becomes possible.

A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. As a result, it is possible to perform a wide variety of displays as displays corresponding to the management results of the game history. In addition, due to the presence of a plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204, the display mode is enlarged depending on whether the management result of the game history is displayed or when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to make a difference.

When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, which are not in the non-display state when displaying the management result of the game history, are in the non-display state. As a result, the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be displayed simply by confirming whether the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly identify which one of them is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are brought into the display state, and the display content is the third display in the case of displaying the management result of the game history. , 4th notification display devices 203 and 204. By overlapping the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 in this manner, the display corresponding to the management result of the game history and the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. It becomes possible not to restrict each display content when it is performed. In addition, even if the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 can overlap in this way, when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 Since the second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

If an error display start operation is performed in a situation where no information on an abnormal state is stored in the error display area 211, the information on the abnormal state is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time. may be configured to display corresponding to the fact that is not stored.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management output process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the first embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing management output processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 .

First, it is determined whether or not the management start flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3501). The management start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether history information should be stored in the history memory 117 or not. In this embodiment, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is the management start reference. The history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the number corresponding to the value or more, and when the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes the number corresponding to the management start reference value or more. Storing history information in history memory 117 is started. At the stage of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is sometimes checked before shipment, and at that time, game balls are put in each ball entry section and the operation after that is checked. On the other hand, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the result of entering a ball at the time of operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, "7" is set in the starting control counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3502). The management counter at the start determines which of the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is in a situation where the detection state of the game ball is specified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1". This is a counter for specifying by the main side CPU 63 .

After that, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the control counter at start is set to "1" (step S3503). Specifically, when the value of the management counter at the start is "7" and corresponds to the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1". , when the value of the management counter at the start is "6" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", and management at the start is performed. When the value of the counter is "5" and corresponds to the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the management counter at the start is determined. If it is "4" and corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1". If it corresponds to the operating opening detection sensor 46a, it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1". 47a, it is determined whether or not the sixth output flag is set to "1". determines whether or not the seventh output flag is set to "1". As already described, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, the output flag corresponding to the value of the control counter at start is cleared to "0" (step S3504). After that, 1 is added to the value of the discharged number counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3505). The discharge number counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where the management start flag of the main side RAM 65 is not set to "1".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharged number counter is greater than or equal to the management start reference value (step S3506). Although the management start reference value is set to "300", it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be a number less than "300" or to be a number greater than "300". .

If a negative determination is made in step S3503 or if a negative determination is made in step S3506, 1 is subtracted from the value of the control counter at the start of the main RAM 65 (step S3507). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start time management counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3508). If a negative determination is made in step S3508, the process returns to step S3503, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3508, this management output process ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the discharge number counter of the main RAM 65 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value (step S3506: YES), the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3509). Thereafter, management processing is executed (step S3510). Also, if the management start flag is set to "1" and the determination in step S3501 is affirmative, the management process is executed (step S3510). The contents of the management process are the same as steps S1001 to S1012 of the management output process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is managed. History information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the management start reference value until the number reaches or exceeds the start reference value. In this case, storage of history information in history memory 117 is started. At the stage of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is sometimes checked before shipment, and at that time, game balls are put in each ball entry section and the operation after that is checked. On the other hand, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the result of entering a ball at the time of operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

Here, after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started as described above, until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value, In a configuration in which history information is not stored in the memory 117, it is impossible to calculate the management result of the game history during that period. Therefore, in such a situation, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to display corresponding to the situation. For example, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, all the display segments may be configured to emit light. Since the display content is not displayed either when the game history management result is displayed or when it is displayed that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changeable, it is not displayed. By checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to identify whether or not the history information is not stored as described above.

It should be noted that, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, depending on whether or not the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changeable or not, the setting mode of the information of the management start flag of the main side RAM 65 is different. It is good also as a structure which carries out. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the main processing in the alternative mode executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. In steps S3601 to S3609, the same processes as steps S101 to S109 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed, and in steps S3611 to S3620, the main process (FIG. The same processing as steps S110 to S119 of 9) is executed. On the other hand, in this alternative embodiment, if the determination in step S3608 is affirmative, the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3610), and after executing the processing of step S3620, the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared. is set to "1" (step S3621). According to this configuration, when the processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. The history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the value becomes equal to or greater than the management start reference value, and when the processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the pachinko machine 10 is processed. History information is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the number of discharged game balls after the supply of operating power is started. As a result, it is possible to manage the game history immediately after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where there is a high possibility that the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 is not performed.

Also, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started becomes equal to or greater than the management start reference value. Alternatively, an area may be provided separately from the history memory 117 for storing history information until the total number of game balls reaches or exceeds the management start reference value. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in the situation.

Also, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started becomes equal to or greater than the management start reference value. As a condition for generating a situation where there is no history information, a condition may be added in which supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where history information is not stored in the history memory 117.例文帳に追加In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the history information is already stored in the history memory 117, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA is the management start reference. The history information is stored in the history memory 117 from the beginning regardless of whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the value.

Also, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started becomes equal to or greater than the management start reference value. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which there is no radio wave detection abnormality or vibration detection abnormality, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 until the abnormal state is cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent history information from being stored for an event that occurred in an abnormal state.

Also, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started becomes equal to or greater than the management start reference value. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 when the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open. As a result, it is possible to prevent history information from being stored with respect to an event that occurs while the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) As a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game is calculated. The result of division by the total number of game balls discharged from the PA may be calculated. In addition to or instead of this, a configuration for calculating the result obtained by dividing the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode by the total number of balls entering the first operating opening 33 and the number of entering balls entering the second operating opening 34. may be

(2) As a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode, the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game play and the number of occurrences of the opening and closing execution mode is calculated. However, in addition to or instead of this, it may be configured to calculate the result obtained by dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. In addition to or instead of this, the result obtained by dividing the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode by the total number of the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is calculated. may be configured.

(3) As a game result that triggers the opening/closing execution mode, not only the big win result but also the small win result may be present. Although the open/close execution mode is generated when a small winning result is obtained, the winning/failure lottery mode and the support mode are not changed before and after the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode resulting in a small hit result, it may be configured to be a low frequency winning mode. In this case, when a large winning result occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the big winning result is stored in the history memory 117, and when a small winning result occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the small winning result is stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to be stored in the memory 117 for use. Further, in this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 may be used to calculate the parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the big winning result and the parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the small winning result.

Further, the configuration may be such that the probability of winning a small winning result changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, or may be such a configuration that it does not change. When the probability of winning a small winning result changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning a small winning result. A configuration with a low probability of occurrence may also be used.

In addition, in a configuration in which a small hit result exists, reservation information acquired when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 and acquired when a game ball enters the second operating port 34 In the case of a big win result with the holding information, the allocation ratio of the kind of the big win result is different, and when aiming to enter the first operation port 33, the variable display unit 36 is displayed in the game area PA. A shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down in the area on the left side, and when aiming to enter the second operation port 34, the game ball flows down in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. In addition, it may be configured such that a small hit result can occur based on the hold information acquired when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 .

In this configuration, the following 51st parameter may be present as a result of managing the game history. It should be noted that the normal period is the sum of the execution period of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result based on the ball entering the first operating opening 33 and the execution period of the low frequency support mode instead of the opening and closing execution mode. do. Also, the number of balls entering the outlet 24a during the normal period is defined as the number of balls entering K51, the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 during the normal period is defined as the number of balls entering K52, and the number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 during the normal period. The number of balls entered into the first operating port 33 during the normal period is defined as K54, and the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 during the normal period is defined as K55.
51st parameter: total number of game balls paid out in the normal period (K52 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning port 31" + K53 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K54 x "first The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA during the normal period (K51+K52+K53+K54+K55) above In the configuration where the 51st parameter is calculated, when the winning probability of the small winning result varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. becomes. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used for calculating the 51st parameter is deleted when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. On the other hand, when the winning probability of the small winning result does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used for calculating the 51st parameter is not erased even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

(4) Instead of the configuration in which the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the type of jackpot result generated, the history information corresponding to the type of jackpot result. may be stored in the history memory 117 . In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency is calculated for each type of jackpot result.

(5) Various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters and 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated periodically, Without being limited to this, for example, when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches the calculation trigger number (for example, 10000), various parameters may be calculated. Various parameters may be calculated when the supply of operating power is stopped, and various parameters may be calculated when the number of times the game is executed reaches the calculation trigger number (for example, 1000 times). good. In this case, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0" at the timing when various parameters are calculated.

(6) All of the 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated each time it is time to calculate various parameters. However, it is not limited to this, and only some of the above various parameters are subject to calculation at one calculation timing, and the parameter group to be calculated is sequentially changed each time the calculation timing comes. may be configured. For example, the 1st to 8th parameters are calculated at one calculation timing, the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, and the next calculation is performed. The 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters may be calculated at the timing, and thereafter, the change of the calculation object in the above order may be repeated every time the calculation timing comes. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating the parameters at one calculation timing.

(7) The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated using the history information in the history memory 117 under the condition that a game is being played. For example, the configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated on the condition that game balls are supplied to the game area PA. As a result, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being wastefully repeated even though the game is not being played.

(8) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the management IC 66 is provided separately from the main side CPU 63 , and the configuration may be such that the main side CPU 63 performs the function of the management IC 66 . In this case, the correspondence information is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. Alternatively, the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be provided separately from the main RAM 65. The configuration may be such that the function of the storage memory 171 is achieved. In the configuration in which the functions of the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are performed in the main RAM 65, when the main RAM 65 is cleared (steps S105 and S117), the history memory A part or all of the areas corresponding to the memory 117, the calculation result memory 131 and the separate storage memory 171 may be cleared to "0". The area corresponding to each of the memory 171 may be excluded from being cleared to "0", and may be cleared to "0" when the corresponding clear condition in each of the above embodiments is satisfied. Further, in the main RAM 65, the contents of the manual operation for executing the clear process may be different between the areas corresponding to the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 and the other areas. good. Alternatively, the function of the management IC 66 may be implemented by the sound emission control device 81 .

(9) When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased. A configuration in which the parameters are deleted may be employed. This makes it possible to prevent notification of various parameters calculated before the setting is performed after the setting state is newly set.

(10) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set (that is, even if the setting value update process is executed by the main side CPU 63), the A configuration may be adopted in which the clearing process of the history memory 117 is not executed when the set value is not changed before and after the setting. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even though the set values have not been changed.

In this configuration, even if the area for storing the set values in the main RAM 65 is completely cleared (step S117), it is not cleared to "0", so that the set value update process ( Before and after step S118), it becomes possible for the main side CPU 63 to identify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when the main CPU 63 determines that the setting value has not been changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal so that the management CPU 112 does not execute the setting update recognition process. may be configured to output a signal to the management side CPU 112 so that the management side CPU 112 executes the setting update recognition processing when it is specified that the setting value has been changed.

Further, when a signal indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set is received from the main side CPU 63, the management side CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the setting value has been changed. In this case, if the management side CPU 112 identifies that the setting value has not been changed, the history memory 117 is not cleared, and the management side CPU 112 identifies that the setting value has been changed. In this case, it is possible to execute the clearing process of the history memory 117 .

(11) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set (that is, even if the set value update process is executed by the main side CPU 63), the If the set value is not changed before and after the setting, a configuration may be adopted in which the arithmetic processing of various parameters is not executed with the new setting of the setting state as a trigger. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated with a new setting of the setting state as a trigger even though the setting value has not been changed.

In this configuration, even if the area for storing the set values in the main RAM 65 is completely cleared (step S117), it is not cleared to "0", so that the set value update process ( Before and after step S118), it becomes possible for the main side CPU 63 to identify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when the main CPU 63 determines that the setting value has not been changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal so that the management CPU 112 does not execute the setting update recognition process. may be configured to output a signal to the management side CPU 112 so that the management side CPU 112 executes the setting update recognition processing when it is specified that the setting value has been changed.

Further, when a signal indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set is received from the main side CPU 63, the management side CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the setting value has been changed. In this case, if the management side CPU 112 identifies that the setting value has not been changed, the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state is not executed, and the management side CPU 112 sets When it is specified that the value has been changed, it is possible to execute the calculation of various parameters with the new setting of the current setting state as a trigger.

(12) In the third to fifth embodiments, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters may be calculated in various calculation processes (step S1807) at that time. At that time, various parameters stored in the memory for calculation result 131 are stored in the area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171, and the calculation is performed. The information stored in the result memory 131 may be cleared to "0". In this case, since it is not necessary to calculate various parameters in the situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to complete the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171 early. Become.

(13) In the third to fifth embodiments, the contents of various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 are displayed by performing a predetermined display start operation. The information may be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c or another display device. The predetermined display start operation may be performed by operating a dedicated operation unit, or may be performed by performing a predetermined dedicated operation on an operation unit for performing other operations. This makes it possible to easily check various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171 .

(14) All of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are configured to be subject to storage of history information (or ball entry history). , and only a part of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is the object of storing the history information may be For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, or only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. It's okay. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the manner in which game balls enter the ball-entering portion for which the history information is to be stored in a predetermined period.

(15) A signal path for transmitting information corresponding to the game ball entry result in association with each of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. 118a to 118c are set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball-entering result for the same type of ball-entering unit is provided when a plurality of the same type of ball-entering units exist. A configuration may be used in which a plurality of ball-entering detection sensors exist correspondingly, or a configuration in which one type of information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 .

(16) Correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. The configuration is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66 . In this case, there is no need to execute processing for making the management IC 66 recognize the correspondence information, so the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

(17) The transmission from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the respective buffers 122a to 122o is Although it is configured to be performed at the start of supply of operating power, it is not limited to this. The correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when the signal is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main side CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, it is configured to be stored and held in the correspondence memory 116 . This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

(18) Transmission from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is performed by each entering ball detection sensor. Although the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information on the detection results of 42a to 48a are used, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. A configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmission is provided may be employed. Thereby, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 by the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(19) While information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Information may be transmitted to the side CPU 63 . For example, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on history information may be transmitted to the main side CPU 63 . In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means so as to perform notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters. By transmitting a command corresponding to the content of the parameter to the sound emission control device 81, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are used to execute the notification corresponding to the content of the various parameters. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

(20) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters may be notified using the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the like. In this case, it becomes possible to confirm whether or not the game ball entry state in the game area PA was normal on the business day immediately before the opening of the game hall.

(21) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start the game until the prohibition release operation is performed. may be As a configuration that prevents the game from starting, for example, it may be configured to prohibit the shooting of game balls, or may be configured to disable the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. A configuration may be adopted in which the winning/failure determination process is not executed even if a prize is won to the 33 or the second operating opening 34 . In addition, the prohibition release operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the reset button 68c is pressed. It is good also as operation of the operation means which becomes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played in a state where the game ball enters the game area PA in an abnormal manner. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being played in a state where the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is abnormal.

(22) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. may not be executed. In this case, the history information may be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and various parameters may be calculated using the read history information by the operator of the reading operation. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the read history information in an external device. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 .

(23) The management IC 66 is provided with a power supply separate from that of the main CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 can calculate various parameters using history information. Alternatively, it may be configured to be capable of outputting information of history information or various parameters. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device.

(24) The reading terminal 68d used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters in an external device, but this is not the only option. Instead, a terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by an external device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 68d for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminals used for reading history information or various parameters may be provided on the MPU 62 or may be provided at a position different from the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 .

(25) The configuration in which the memory for correspondence 116, the memory for history 117, and the memory for calculation result 131 are provided as non-volatile storage means such as a flash memory is not limited. is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and retain information, and when backup power is supplied to the memory, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. However, the information may be stored and held. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for the memory, and backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65. good too.

(26) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU, and history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing are executed based on programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113. , a hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66 . Specifically, for the configuration, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main side CPU 63 indicating that the game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. do. Further, for example, in the case of the sixth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main side CPU 63, the signal is received. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. In addition, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that point in time when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment. Further, when an external output opportunity to the reading terminal 68d occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters which are the calculation results and also outputs the history information.

(27) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

(28) Regarding the number of game balls entering the out hole 24a, the number of balls entering the outlet 24a is counted. History information including RTC information may be stored with respect to ball entry into the privilege opportunity ball entry section, which triggers payout of prize balls and winning/failure determination processing. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball entry part with respect to the total number of discharged game balls while making it possible to extract the history of game balls entering the privilege opportunity ball entry part. Become.

(29) A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined event that triggers storage of history information includes events other than those in the above embodiments. For example, at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a has become full, the timing at which the full-tank state started, and the timing at which the full-tank state is canceled may be stored as history information. At least one of the no-ball state, the timing at which the no-ball state was started, and the timing at which the no-ball state was canceled may be stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 was in an abnormal state. Alternatively, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(30) In the first embodiment, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, it is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. may be Further, in the above-described first embodiment, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the set value update signal. However, it is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 recognizes that the fifteenth buffer 122 o corresponds to the set value update signal by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63 . may be configured. In this case, there is no need to set in advance in the management IC 66 the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p.

(31) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(32) The display device that displays the setting values that are being updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is not limited to the third notification display device 69c, and may be the pattern display device 41. may be a display device.

(33) The operation unit operated to update the setting values in the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is not limited to the update button 68b, and may be the reset button 68c. Further, positions corresponding to "setting 1" to "setting 6" are set as rotation operation positions when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and rotated. A configuration may be adopted in which a setting value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the portion 68a is set. In addition, the setting key inserting portion 68a is configured so that it can be turned further beyond the ON position, and each time the turning operation beyond the ON position is performed, the setting value in the process of updating is changed to the setting value of the next order. It may be configured to be updated.

(34) In the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are arranged side by side. It may be arranged obliquely side by side, or may be arranged side by side so as to form two upper and lower stages. Further, in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side, but they may be arranged vertically or diagonally. may be arranged side by side, or may be arranged side by side so as to form two upper and lower tiers.

(35) History information (hereinafter referred to as history information to be changed) used for calculating parameters whose normal values change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 History information used for calculating parameters whose normal values do not fluctuate accordingly (hereinafter referred to as non-variable history information) may be stored in different areas in the history memory 117 . In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the area in which the history information to be changed is stored in the history memory 117 is "0". While cleared, the area in which non-variable history information is stored in the history memory 117 may be configured not to be cleared to "0". As a result, the parameters whose normal values fluctuate according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately calculated even after the setting values are changed, and the normal values do not fluctuate according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The accuracy of parameter calculation can be improved.

(36) Display control based on commands sent from the main controller 60 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on commands sent from the main controller 60 The device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 81 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of these two control devices may be changed. may be integrated into the main controller 60 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into the main controller 60 . Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are arbitrary.

(37) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, for example, when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever, the result of the lottery process executed for the winning combination is stored as history information. , and the history information may be used to calculate the actual winning probability of each combination. The information may be used to calculate the actual probability of transition to the special game state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special game state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by an external device, or the game machine itself may provide notification corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters. In addition, it may be configured such that there are a plurality of setting states such as "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the probability of winning in the winning lottery process may be changed according to the setting state. In this case, the configuration in each of the above embodiments may be applied with respect to the handling of history information, the calculation of various parameters, and the handling of repetitive changes when a setting state setting is newly set or a setting value is changed. .

(38) The characteristic configurations of the first to fourteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in arbitrary combinations. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment may be combined. Combining the characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eleventh embodiment good too. In addition, any combination of the configurations of the different modes may be applied to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to fourteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the corresponding game in history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game )and,
Information erasing means (third The function of executing the processing of step S1809 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the step S2306 to step S2306 in the management side CPU 112 in the sixth embodiment. a function of executing the processing of S2308 (a function of executing the processing of step S2608 in the management-side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the set value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using this managed information. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, at least part of the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is newly set. As a result, it is possible to adjust the contents of the history storage means so as to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation after the setting value to be used is newly set. .

Feature A2. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the granting correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination A function to execute the processing of S409 to step S412),
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein a probability of the award correspondence result in the award determination varies according to the set value.

According to the feature A2, it is possible to change the probability of the award corresponding result according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature A1, the history storage means can preferably manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation after the probability of the grant correspondence result is changed. Content can be adjusted.

Feature A3. The information erasing means erases all of the history information stored in the history storing means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2.

According to feature A3, when the setting value to be used is newly set, all the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted, so that the setting value to be used is set. It is possible to specify the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event based on the timing at which the is newly performed.

Feature A4. The information erasing means erases part of the history information stored in the history storage means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein part of the history information stored in the history storage means is left.

According to the feature A4, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information unnecessary for managing the frequency of occurrence of the subsequent predetermined events is deleted, and the history information is deleted to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined events thereafter. It becomes possible to leave necessary history information. As a result, it is possible to appropriately manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event after the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature A5. The history information stored in the history storage means includes first history information (a history indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has occurred) in which the probability of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information varies according to the set value. information) and second history information (history information indicating that the game ball has been discharged from the game area PA) that does not vary according to the set value,
The information erasing means erases the first history information stored in the history storing means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means, and The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the second history information stored in history storage means is left.

According to feature A5, when a setting value to be used is newly set, the first history information corresponding to the predetermined event whose occurrence probability varies according to the setting value is deleted, and the occurrence probability changes to the setting value. The second history information corresponding to the predetermined event that does not change depending on the time is not erased. As a result, when the first history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly set is inherited after the setting of the setting value is newly performed, a predetermined event corresponding to the first history information occurs. The first history information that is not preferable for specifying the frequency can be deleted when the setting value is newly set. On the other hand, since the second history information is not deleted even if the setting value to be used is newly set, it is referred to when specifying the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information. Since it is possible to secure a large number of second history information, it is possible to accurately identify the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information.

Feature A6. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the granting correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination A function to execute the processing of S409 to step S412),
A configuration in which the probability of the grant correspondence result in the grant determination varies according to the set value,
The first history information includes information corresponding to the provision of the privilege,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to ejection of game balls from the gaming area in a predetermined manner.

According to feature A6, since the probability of granting a privilege varies according to the setting value, the first history information is deleted when the setting value to be used is newly set. , it is possible to specify the privilege giving frequency under the circumstances of the newly set setting value. On the other hand, since the frequency with which game balls are ejected from the game area does not change according to the setting value, the second history information is not deleted even if the setting value to be used is newly set. It is possible to accurately specify the frequency with which game balls are discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner.

Feature A7. The information erasing means, when the set value to be used is set by the setting means, when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means, at least the history information is deleted. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that part of the game is erased.

According to feature A7, if the history storage means does not store a predetermined amount of history information or more, the history information is not deleted even if a new set value to be used is set. This makes it possible to prevent repeated erasure of the history information in the history storage means even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation in which no game is played.

Feature A8. Using the history information stored in the history storage means as at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set, the result of the game in a predetermined period is handled. information deriving means for deriving mode information to The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that

According to the feature A8, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is provided with the configuration of the feature A1, and under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is newly set. In the deleted configuration, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to correspond to the result of the game in a predetermined period. Information is derived. As a result, even if at least part of the history information is erased when the setting value is changed, the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed can be grasped. It becomes possible to

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to feature A9, when a new set value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the result of a game played during a predetermined period. is derived, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the mode information storage means can store a plurality of the mode information.

According to feature A10, since it is possible to store a plurality of mode information in the mode information storage means, the management results of the game history in a plurality of periods can be grasped based on the timing at which the setting value is newly set. It becomes possible to Further, even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation in which a game is not played, the mode information derived using the history information of a situation in which a game is actually played is retained by the mode information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in

Feature A11. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
This game machine has means for executing special processing when the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means occurs the number of times exceeding the predetermined number under predetermined conditions (in the third embodiment, the management side CPU 112 A gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, characterized in that it has a function of executing a repeated change monitoring process (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing a repeated change monitoring process in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature A11, the set value is set in a situation in which a game is not played in order to prevent the mode information derived using the history information of the situation in which the game is actually being played from remaining in the mode information storage means. is repeated, special handling is performed on it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A11, wherein the information derivation means derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means. .

According to feature A12, mode information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means, so that it is possible to prevent the mode information from being wastefully derived. .

Feature A13. The information erasing means erases the history information from when the set value to be used is set by the setting means until a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means. before the setting value is set when the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means in a specific amount or more after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means without The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the history information stored in the history storage means is erased.

According to feature A13, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a setting value to be used is newly set, it is stored before the setting is performed. history information that has been stored will not be deleted. This makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history in the predetermined period even if the setting value is newly set.

Feature A14. The history storage means includes first history storage means (first history memory 191) and second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means is
When the predetermined event occurs during a predetermined period from when the set value to be used is set by the setting means until the cancellation condition is satisfied, the history information corresponding to the event is stored in the first history storage means and means for storing in both of the second history storage means (function for executing the process of step S2604 in the management side CPU 112);
Means for storing the history information corresponding to the event in the one of the first history storage means and the second history storage means which is set as a storage target when the predetermined event occurs during a period other than the predetermined period. (a function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the management side CPU 112);
with
The information erasing means erases the history information stored in the one of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that has been set as the storage target until then, when the cancellation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that

According to feature A14, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a setting value to be used is newly set, it is not stored before the setting is performed. history information is not deleted. This makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history in the predetermined period even if the setting value is newly set. In addition, it is possible to produce the effect by simply changing the history storage means to store the history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature A15. Using the history information stored in one of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as the storage object, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized by comprising information deriving means (a function of executing the processing of step S2703 in the management side CPU 112).

According to feature A15, even in a situation where history information is stored in both the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit by setting a new set value, the mode of using the history information. It is possible to appropriately derive information.

For the configuration of features A1 to A15, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the corresponding game in history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game )and,
with
The predetermined history information stored in the history storage means before the set value to be used is set by the setting means is used to set the set value to be used by the setting means. The game machine is characterized in that it is stored and held in the history storage means even after it has been played.

According to the feature B1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the set value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using this managed information. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage means is stored and held without being erased. As a result, even when the set value to be used is set, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history storage means, and the history information can be accumulated in the history storage means over a long period of time. It becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history by using the history information obtained.

Feature B2. The history storage execution means stores the history information corresponding to the setting value to be used by the setting means in the history storage means (first memory execution means). In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1307 in the management-side CPU 112, and in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2408 in the management-side CPU 112). machine.

According to the characteristic B2, in the configuration in which the history information is stored and held without being deleted even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the setting value to be used is newly set. History information corresponding to that is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to distinguish between the history information before the new setting of the setting value to be used and the history information after the setting.

Feature B3. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the memory execution unit at the time of setting stores information corresponding to the set value as the history information in the history storage unit. The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized by:

According to feature B3, it is possible to specify the content of the setting value that was set in the past by referring to the history information.

Feature B4. The history storage means is provided with a plurality of corresponding history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features B1 to B3.

According to the feature B4, since the correspondence history storage means is provided corresponding to each setting value, it is possible to store the history information separately for each setting value.

Feature B5. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the means (management side A gaming machine according to feature B4, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2406 in the CPU 112.

According to feature B5, when a setting value to be used is newly set, the correspondence history storage means corresponding to that setting value is used as a storage target for subsequent history information. It becomes possible to store the history information separately.

Feature B6. Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the correspondence history storage means (display output processing in management side CPU 112) A gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to feature B6, in a configuration in which history information is stored separately for each set value, it is possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the currently set set value.

Feature B7. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the granting correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination A function to execute the processing of S409 to step S412),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein a probability of the award correspondence result in the award determination varies according to the set value.

According to the feature B7, it is possible to vary the probability of the award corresponding result in accordance with the set value in a so-called pachinko machine.

For the configuration of features B1 to B7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the corresponding game in history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game )and,
Post-setting handling means that does not erase the history information until at least a specific amount of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. (a function of executing the processing of steps S2506 and steps S2605 to S2609 in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the set value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using this managed information. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, it is not stored before the setting is performed. history information is not deleted. This makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history in the predetermined period even if the setting value is newly set.

Feature C2. The post-setting handling means sets the set value when the history information stored in the history storage means is equal to or greater than the specific amount after the set value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the history information stored in the history storage means is erased before the is performed.

According to feature C2, when a specific amount of history information is stored in the history storage means, which makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period after the setting value is newly set. , the history information stored in the history storage means before the new setting of the set value is performed is erased. This makes it possible to prevent useless history information from being continuously stored in the history storage means.

Feature C3. The history storage means includes first history storage means (first history memory 191) and second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means is
When the predetermined event occurs, means for storing the history information corresponding to the event (step S2603 in the management side CPU 112 function to execute the processing of
After the set value to be used is set by the setting unit, the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means (management side CPU 112) for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means until the specific amount or more is stored. a function to execute the process of step S2604 in
with
The post-setting handling means includes:
After the set value to be used is set by the setting unit, the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage object. means for changing the storage target between the first history storage means and the second history storage means when the specified amount or more is stored (function for executing the process of step S2607 in the management-side CPU 112);
After the set value to be used is set by the setting unit, the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage object. Means for erasing the history information of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that has been set as the storage target until then (step S2608 in the management side CPU 112) function to execute the processing of
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C3, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a setting value to be used is newly set, it is not stored before the setting is performed. history information is not deleted. This makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history in the predetermined period even if the setting value is newly set. In addition, it is possible to produce the effect by simply changing the history storage means to store the history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature C4. Using the history information stored in one of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as the storage object, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived. The gaming machine according to feature C3, further comprising information deriving means (a function of executing the processing of step S2703 in the management side CPU 112).

According to the feature C4, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means by setting a new setting value, the history information is used. It is possible to appropriately derive information.

Feature C5. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the granting correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination A function to execute the processing of S409 to step S412),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein a probability of the award correspondence result in the award determination varies according to the set value.

According to the feature C5, it is possible to change the probability of the award corresponding result in accordance with the set value in a so-called pachinko machine.

For the configuration of features C1 to C5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Special execution means for executing special processing under at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is executed in a special situation (monitoring of repeated changes in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment a function to execute processing, a function to execute repeated change monitoring processing in the main side CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment, a function to make a negative determination in step S2106 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D1, since the set value to be used is set from a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage, the set value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that In this case, the special processing is executed under at least one condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in a special situation. This makes it possible to deal with the case where the setting values are newly set under unfavorable circumstances.

Feature D2. Characteristic D1 characterized in that the special execution means executes the special process under at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed more than a specific number of times in the special situation. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature D2, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is executed in a special situation, if the number of times of execution is less than the specified number of times, special processing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special processing from being executed even when the regular operator performs the new setting of the set value less than a specified number of times in a special situation.

Feature D3. The special execution means sets, as the special situation, a situation in which no game has been played since the set value to be used was set by the setting means, or setting of the set value to be used by the setting means. executing the special processing under at least one condition that the set value to be used has been set by the setting means in a situation where a game of a predetermined standard or more has not been played since the The gaming machine according to the characterizing feature D1 or D2.

According to feature D3, special processing is executed when a new set value to be used is set in a situation where a game is not being played or a game is not substantially being played. If the act is done, it will be possible to deal with it.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the special execution means executes notification processing as the special processing.

According to feature D4, the notification process is executed under at least one condition that a new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in a special situation. This makes it possible to prompt the user to deal with the new setting of the setting value under unfavorable circumstances.

Feature D5. History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the corresponding game in history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game )and,
Using the history information stored in the history storage means as at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set, the result of the game in a predetermined period is handled. information derivation means for deriving mode information (a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D5, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using this managed information. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is obtained by using the history information stored in the history storage means. derived. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature D6. The special execution means derives the mode information by the information derivation means as the special processing, under at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is executed in the special situation. The gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized in that it does not allow the game to be played.

According to the feature D6, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, if the setting is made in an unfavorable situation, the mode information is not derived. This makes it possible to prevent the mode information from being wastefully derived.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D5 or D6, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to the feature D7, when a new set value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the result of the game during a predetermined period. is derived, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the mode information storage means can store a plurality of the mode information.

According to the characteristic D8, since it is possible to store a plurality of mode information in the mode information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods can be grasped based on the timing at which the setting value is newly set. It becomes possible to Further, even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation in which a game is not played, the mode information derived using the history information of a situation in which a game is actually played is retained by the mode information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in

Feature D9. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
Characteristic D7, characterized in that the special execution means executes the special processing when the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means occurs more than the predetermined number in the special situation. Or the gaming machine described in D8.

According to the feature D9, the setting value is set under a situation where a game is not played so that the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually played does not remain in the mode information storage means. is repeated, special handling is performed on it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature D10. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the granting correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination A function to execute the processing of S409 to step S412),
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein a probability of the award correspondence result in the award determination varies according to the set value.

According to the feature D10, it is possible to change the probability of the result corresponding to the award according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine.

For the configuration of features D1 to D10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the corresponding game in history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game )and,
Using the history information stored in the history storage means as at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set, the result of the game in a predetermined period is handled. information derivation means for deriving mode information (a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, since the set value to be used is set from a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage, the set value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using this managed information. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is obtained by using the history information stored in the history storage means. derived. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to the feature E2, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. is derived, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the mode information storage means can store a plurality of the mode information.

According to the feature E3, since a plurality of pieces of mode information can be stored in the mode information storage means, the management results of the game history in a plurality of periods can be grasped based on the timing at which the set value is newly set. It becomes possible to Further, even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation in which a game is not played, the mode information derived using the history information of a situation in which a game is actually played is retained by the mode information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in

Feature E4. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
This game machine has means for executing special processing when the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means occurs the number of times exceeding the predetermined number under predetermined conditions (in the third embodiment, the management side CPU 112 The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, characterized by comprising a function of executing a repeated change monitoring process (a function of executing a repeated change monitoring process in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature E4, the set value is set under a situation in which a game is not played in order to prevent the mode information derived using the history information of the situation in which the game is actually being played from remaining in the mode information storage means. is repeated, special handling is performed on it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics E1 to E4, wherein the information derivation means derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means. .

According to feature E5, mode information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means, so it is possible to prevent the mode information from being wastefully derived. Become.

Feature E6. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the granting correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination A function to execute the processing of S409 to step S412),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the probability of the award corresponding result in the award determination varies according to the set value.

According to the characteristic E6, it is possible to change the probability of the result corresponding to the award according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine.

For the configuration of features E1 to E6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, and the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the granting correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the granting determination A function to execute the processing of S409 to step S412);
setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
with
The provision determination means has a high probability mode and a low probability mode as modes of the provision determination so that the probability of the provision correspondence result is relatively high and low,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of the award corresponding result varies at least in the low-probability mode according to the set value.

According to the feature F1, it is possible to vary the probability of a given corresponding result at least in the low-probability mode according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine. As a result, even in a single gaming machine, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of the award corresponding result is advantageous or disadvantageous in the low-probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein in the high probability mode, the probability of obtaining the award correspondence result does not vary according to the set value.

According to the feature F2, while the probability of the grant correspondence result in the low probability mode is changed according to the set value, the probability of the grant correspondence result in the high probability mode is not changed according to the set value. By doing so, it becomes possible to limit the influence of the setting value to the situation in the low-probability mode.

Feature F3. There are multiple types of benefits,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the mode of selection of the privilege does not change according to the set value.

According to the feature F3, the probability of obtaining a grant response result in the low-probability mode is varied according to the set value, while the selection mode of the privilege is not varied according to the set value, so that the influence of the set value can be restricted to situations in the low-probability mode.

For the configuration of features F1 to F3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group F, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the corresponding game in history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game )and,
Information deriving means (steps S1402 to S1412 in the management side CPU 112 in the first embodiment) for deriving mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means. , a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
Information display means (first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, eleventh to third In the fourteenth embodiment, the first information display control means (function for executing display processing in the management side CPU 112) that controls the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
Second information display control means (in the first to tenth embodiments, step S202 and step S208 in the main side CPU 63 In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S3101, S3103, and S3109 in the main CPU 63. In the twelfth embodiment, steps S3201, S3202, and S3204 in the main CPU 63. and a function of executing the process of step S3210, a function of executing an abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G1, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using this managed information. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game during the predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to other information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

Feature G2. Characteristic feature G1 according to feature G1, characterized in that a period in which the display corresponding to the mode information is performed on the information display means and a period in which the display corresponding to the different information is performed on the information display means are distinguished. game machine.

According to feature G2, by grasping the status of display on the information display means, it is possible to determine which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed on the information display means. can be specified.

Feature G3. The second information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that the display corresponding to the different information is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that

According to feature G3, by grasping the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed in the information display means. It becomes possible.

Feature G4. As the information display means, individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to fourteenth In the embodiment, the game machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that it comprises a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to the feature G4, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information by using a plurality of individual information display means to display corresponding to the mode information. In addition, due to the presence of a plurality of individual information display means, it is possible to make the display mode significantly different between the case where the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and the case where the display corresponding to the other information is performed. .

Feature G5. The second information display control means, when displaying corresponding to the different information, controls a predetermined individual information displaying means that does not enter a non-display state when displaying corresponding to the mode information among the plurality of individual information displaying means. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, second notification Characteristic G4 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature G5, the predetermined individual information display means, which is not in a non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, is in a non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. As a result, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the separate information is being performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. becomes possible.

Feature G6. The second information display control means, when displaying corresponding to the different information, selects a specific individual information display means (second 3rd notification display device 69c in 1st to 10th embodiments, 4th notification display device 204 in 11th and 12th embodiments, 3rd notification display device 203 and 4th notification in 13th embodiment display device 204) to be in the display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the different information is performed can be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature G5.

According to the feature G6, the display contents that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed in the specific individual information display means can also be displayed when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. It becomes possible not to restrict the display contents when the display corresponding to the information is performed. In addition, even if the specific individual information display means has a configuration that can display the same display content, it will not be in a non-display state if it has the configuration of feature G5 and displays corresponding to the mode information. Since predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state when display corresponding to different information is performed, it is possible to specify which display is being performed in a plurality of individual information display means.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the first information display control means brings each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when performing display corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature G7, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state. It is possible to make a clear distinction from the case where display is performed.

Feature G8. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information on the information display means. The game machine according to any one of features G5 to G7, characterized in that it is not maintained at

According to the feature G8, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed in the plurality of individual information display means regardless of the timing of confirming the plurality of individual information display means. becomes possible.

Feature G9. The second information display control means controls one specific individual information display means among the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, the eleventh In the embodiment, any of the features G5 to G8 characterized in that the display corresponding to the separate information is performed on the fourth notification display device 204), and the remaining individual information display means are put into a non-display state. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to feature G9, when the display corresponding to the separate information is performed, only one individual information display means is in the display state, so it is easy to grasp whether the display corresponding to the separate information is being performed. Become.

Feature G10. The plurality of individual information display means are arranged in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the specific individual information display means is present at an end in the predetermined direction among the plurality of individual information display means arranged in the predetermined direction.

According to feature G10, since one individual information display means for displaying information corresponding to different information is present at an end in a predetermined direction, it is possible to grasp whether or not displaying corresponding to different information is being performed. becomes easier.

Feature G11. The first information display control means is a part of the plurality of individual information display means, the individual information display means for type display (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, the eleventh In the 14th embodiment, a display corresponding to the type of the mode information to be displayed is performed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202), and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means for result display, which is a part of the results display device (second notification display device 69b and third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, and the second notification display device 69c in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments Display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed on the 3rd notification display device 203 and the 4th notification display device 204) is performed,
The game machine according to any one of features G5 to G10, wherein the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the individual information display means for the type display target.

According to the feature G11, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the display corresponding to the type of the mode information to be displayed is performed in the individual information display means for the type display, and the individual information for the result display is displayed. The display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed is performed by the means. This makes it easier to grasp the mode information to be displayed. In this case, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the individual information display means for the type display target is in the non-display state, so that the non-display state of the type display corresponds to the different information. If other information is displayed, it becomes easier to understand.

Feature G12. The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting portions (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by combining unit light emitting portions that are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting portions. is a configuration that allows
The second information display control means responds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting portion that can be in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the mode information is performed among the plurality of unit light emitting portions to a light emitting state. The combination of the unit light-emitting portions that are in a light-emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The game machine according to any one of the features G1 to G11, characterized in that it is designed to be combined.

According to the feature G12, the display corresponding to the other information is performed by setting the unit light-emitting portions that can be in the light-emitting state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed to the light-emitting state, so that the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. In order to diversify the information, it is possible to limit the contents of the display corresponding to the mode information as little as possible. On the other hand, the combination of the unit light-emitting portions that are in the light-emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Accordingly, by grasping the combination of the unit light-emitting portions that are in the light-emitting state, it is possible to grasp which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed.

Feature G13. There are a plurality of display modes of display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means,
The game according to feature G12, characterized in that none of the plurality of unit light-emitting portions does not enter a light-emitting state even when all the displays corresponding to the mode information of the plurality of modes are performed. machine.

According to feature G13, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, any combination of the unit light-emitting portions is set to the light-emitting state. It is possible to limit the contents of the display corresponding to the information as little as possible.

Feature G14. Specific individual information display means which is the information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the thirteenth In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) are provided,
The second information display control means, when displaying corresponding to the different information, controls a predetermined individual information displaying means that does not enter a non-display state when displaying corresponding to the mode information among the plurality of individual information displaying means. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, second notification Characteristic G12 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are put into a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in G13.

According to the feature G14, the predetermined individual information display means, which is not in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. As a result, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the separate information is being performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. becomes possible.

Feature G15. A setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, wherein the second information display control means displays a display corresponding to the different information in a situation where the setting value can be changed.

According to the characteristic G15, it is possible to use the information display means for performing the display corresponding to the mode information also as the display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

Feature G16. The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the second information display control means displays information corresponding to the setting value currently selected as the display corresponding to the different information.

According to the feature G16, it is possible to use the information display means for displaying information corresponding to the mode information as a display means for displaying the set values that are being changed.

Feature G17. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G16, wherein the second information display control means displays a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine as a display corresponding to the different information.

According to the feature G17, the information display means for performing the display corresponding to the mode information can also be used as the display means for performing the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine.

Feature G18. The second information display control means is characterized in that, when performing a display corresponding to the abnormal state in a situation where the abnormal state has not occurred, the display corresponding to the fact that the abnormal state has not occurred is performed. The gaming machine according to feature G17.

According to feature G18, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

For the configuration of features G1 to G18, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the corresponding game in history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game )and,
Information deriving means (steps S1402 to S1412 in the management side CPU 112 in the first embodiment) for deriving mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means. , a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
Information display means (first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, eleventh to third In the fourteenth embodiment, the first information display control means (function for executing display processing in the management side CPU 112) that controls the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
Second information display control means (in the first to tenth embodiments, step S202 and step S208 in the main side CPU 63 In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S3101, S3103, and S3109 in the main CPU 63. In the twelfth embodiment, steps S3201, S3202, and S3204 in the main CPU 63. and a function of executing the process of step S3210, a function of executing an abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment);
with
The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting portions (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by combining unit light emitting portions that are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting portions. is a configuration that allows
The second information display control means responds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting portion that can be in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the mode information is performed among the plurality of unit light emitting portions to a light emitting state. The combination of the unit light-emitting portions that are in a light-emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is designed to be combined.

According to feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using this managed information. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game during the predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to other information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

In addition, display corresponding to other information is performed by setting the unit light-emitting portions that can be in the light-emitting state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed to the light-emitting state, thereby diversifying the display corresponding to the mode information. It is possible to limit the contents of the display corresponding to the mode information as little as possible. On the other hand, the combination of the unit light-emitting portions that are in the light-emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Accordingly, by grasping the combination of the unit light-emitting portions that are in the light-emitting state, it is possible to grasp which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed.

Feature H2. There are a plurality of display modes of display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means,
The game according to feature H1, characterized in that none of the plurality of unit light emitting portions does not enter a light emitting state even if all of the display corresponding to the aspect information of the plurality of aspects is performed. machine.

According to the feature H2, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, any combination of the unit light-emitting portions is set to the light-emitting state. It is possible to limit the contents of the display corresponding to the information as little as possible.

Feature H3. Specific individual information display means which is the information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the thirteenth In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) are provided,
The second information display control means, when displaying corresponding to the different information, controls a predetermined individual information displaying means that does not enter a non-display state when displaying corresponding to the mode information among the plurality of individual information displaying means. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, second notification Characteristic feature H1 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in H2.

According to the feature H3, the predetermined individual information display means, which is not in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. As a result, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the separate information is being performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. becomes possible.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the first information display control means brings each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when performing display corresponding to the mode information.

According to the feature H4, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state. It is possible to make a clear distinction from the case where display is performed.

Feature H5. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information on the information display means. The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4, characterized in that it is not maintained at

According to the feature H5, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed in the plurality of individual information display means regardless of the timing of confirming the plurality of individual information display means. becomes possible.

Feature H6. A setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the second information display control means displays a display corresponding to the different information in a situation where the setting value can be changed.

According to feature H6, it is possible to use the information display means for performing display corresponding to the mode information as display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the second information display control means displays information corresponding to the setting value currently selected as the display corresponding to the different information.

According to the feature H7, the information display means for displaying the mode information can also be used as the display means for displaying the set values that are being changed.

For the configuration of features H1 to H7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the corresponding game in history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game )and,
Information deriving means (steps S1402 to S1412 in the management side CPU 112 in the first embodiment) for deriving mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means. , a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
A first information display control means (management side a function of executing display processing in the CPU 112;
a second information display control means (function for executing abnormality display processing in the main side CPU 63) that controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using this managed information. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game during the predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

Feature I2. The second information display control means is characterized in that, when performing a display corresponding to the abnormal state in a situation where the abnormal state has not occurred, the display corresponding to the fact that the abnormal state has not occurred is performed. The gaming machine according to feature I1.

According to feature I2, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

Feature I3. Characteristic I1 or I2, characterized in that a period during which the information display means performs display corresponding to the mode information and a period during which the information display means performs display corresponding to the abnormal state are distinguished. The game machine described.

According to feature I3, by grasping the status of display on the information display means, it is possible to determine which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the information display means. can be specified.

Feature I4. The second information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that the display corresponding to the abnormal state is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that

According to feature I4, by grasping the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed in the information display means. It becomes possible.

Feature I5. Characteristics I1 to I4, characterized in that a plurality of individual information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) capable of performing a plurality of types of display are provided as the information display means. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information by using a plurality of individual information display means to display corresponding to the mode information. In addition, due to the presence of a plurality of individual information display means, it is possible to make the display mode significantly different between when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. .

Feature I6. When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, the second information display control means controls, among the plurality of individual information display means, a predetermined individual information display means that does not enter a non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the information display means (the first information display device 201 and the second information display device 202) are set to a non-display state.

According to feature I6, the predetermined individual information display means, which is not in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. Thus, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. becomes possible.

Feature I7. The second information display control means, when performing a display corresponding to the abnormal state, selects a specific individual information display means (second 3 notification display device 203 and 4th notification display device 204) to be in the display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed can be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature I6.

According to the feature I7, the display contents that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed in the specific individual information display means can also be displayed when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. It becomes possible not to restrict the display contents when the display corresponding to the information is performed. In addition, even if the specific individual information display means has a configuration in which the same display contents can be displayed in this way, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed with the configuration of the feature I7, the non-display state does not occur. When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed by the predetermined individual information display means, it is in a non-display state, so it is possible to specify which display is being performed by the plurality of individual information display means.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to feature I6 or I7, wherein the first information display control means puts each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when performing display corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature I8, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state. It is possible to make a clear distinction from the case where display is performed.

Feature I9. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information on the information display means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, characterized in that it is not maintained at

According to feature I9, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed in the plurality of individual information display means regardless of the timing of confirming the plurality of individual information display means. becomes possible.

For the configuration of features I1 to I9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the corresponding game in history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game )and,
Information deriving means (steps S1402 to S1412 in the management side CPU 112 in the first embodiment) for deriving mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means. , a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
Information display means (first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, eleventh to third In the fourteenth embodiment, the first information display control means (function for executing display processing in the management side CPU 112) that controls the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
with
The first information display control means sequentially changes the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means, and the information display means is non-display even when changing the display corresponding to the mode information. A gaming machine characterized by preventing a state from being maintained.

According to the feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using this managed information. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game during the predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to specify the display corresponding to the mode information regardless of the timing of checking the information display means.

Feature J2. As the information display means, individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to fourteenth In the embodiment, the game machine according to feature J1, characterized in that it comprises a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to the feature J2, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information by using a plurality of individual information display means to display corresponding to the mode information.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the first information display control means brings each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when displaying corresponding to the mode information.

According to the feature J3, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, and even when the display corresponding to the mode information is changed, the display state is maintained. maintained. This makes it easier to grasp the mode information.

Feature J4. The first information display control means is a part of the plurality of individual information display means, the individual information display means for type display (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, the eleventh In the 14th embodiment, a display corresponding to the type of the mode information to be displayed is performed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202), and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means for result display, which is a part of the results display device (second notification display device 69b and third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, and the second notification display device 69c in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3, characterized in that display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed is performed in the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204).

According to the characteristic J4, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the display corresponding to the type of the mode information to be displayed is performed in the individual information display means for the type display, and the individual information for the result display is displayed. The display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed is performed by the means. This makes it easier to grasp the mode information to be displayed.

For the configuration of features J1 to J4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the corresponding game in history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game ),
The history storage execution means is means for not storing the history information in the history storage means even if the predetermined event occurs in a restricted situation (a function of making a negative determination in step S3501 in the main MPU 63). ) is provided.

According to the feature K1, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using this managed information. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, since the history information is not stored even if the predetermined event occurs in the restricted situation, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored in a situation where it is undesirable to store the history information. .

Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the restriction condition can occur as a condition from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until a restriction cancellation event occurs.

According to the characteristic K2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the predetermined event due to the operation check immediately after the supply of operating power is started from being stored as history information.

Feature K3. means for setting the restricted condition when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the restriction condition is established (function for executing the process of step S3610 in the main MPU 63); ,
Means for not setting the restricted condition when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the restriction condition is not satisfied (function for executing the process of step S3621 in the main MPU 63) and,
The gaming machine according to feature K2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K3, depending on whether or not the limiting condition is satisfied, there are cases where the limited state is set and cases where it is not set. This makes it possible to prevent the restricted status from being set as necessary.

Feature K4. The limited situation is characterized in that it can occur as a situation from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until the number of game balls discharged from the game area becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number. The game machine according to any one of K1 to K3.

According to the feature K4, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches a predetermined reference number or more after the supply of operating power is started.

For the configuration of features K1 to K4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature group G, the feature group H, the feature group I, the feature group J, and the feature group K, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

10 Pachinko machine 33 First operating port 34 Second operating port 63 Main side CPU 112 Management side CPU 117 History memory 171 Separate storage memory 181 to 186 Setting 1 191 First history memory 192 Second history memory 69a First notification display device 69b Second notification display device 69c Third notification display device , 201 First notification display device 201a to 201g Display segment 202 Second notification display device 202a to 202g Display segment 203 Third notification display device 204 Fourth notification display device.

Claims (1)

a game value imparting means electrically connected to the predetermined detection means and executing a process for imparting a game value to a game;
a process executing means electrically connected to the game value imparting means for executing a predetermined process;
In a gaming machine comprising
The game value imparting means is
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information, which is information used in the processing for imparting the game value and is referred to for detection by the predetermined detection means;
After the predetermined supply of electric power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started, the reference data stored in the first reference information storage means a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to information to the processing executing means;
a second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detection means to the processing execution means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images